Home

StarQuality Ver.3.0, User Manual

image

Contents

1. OK Cancel Figure 4 2 Creating New Equipments from Template WiMAX FDD 5 In the Creation section make sure the Equipment option is selected 6 In the Discover Equipments field select either No to add equipments manually see Step 8 Input File to upload a text file See Step 9 The Yes option is not applicable for WiMAX equipment 7 Inthe Community section override the Read community setting with the relevant one for your network 8 If you selected No a Click OK the system returns to the main network list b Click Add new to add as many equipments as required c In each line enter BTS name free text up to 46 characters description and IP address Name and IP address are mandatory StarQuality User Manual Network Discovery Discovery of WiMAX Devices Site and equipment confi a D x ROOT gt Big setups Operation v a aes Template add new Equipment name Equipment description IP address GH del ays Site Adescrpti WiMAX e site A Site A description Sieten gu 1 WiMAX del H ji 4Motion Figure 4 3 Adding Sites manually NOTE x Searching and displaying of devices in StarQuality is done by names only therefore it is advised to keep a systematic naming convention for example it is recommended to name each device by its IP 9 If you selected Input File a Prepare a text file in which each line signifies a BTS Each line entry includes three columns in th
2. Deleting an alarm is necessary for example if there is no closing event in the definition or a trap has been lost or if the alarm is not relevant anymore In this case if the alarm has not been acknowledged yet then it becomes acknowledged as well ROOT Operation 7j Link view StarQuality Threshold name TDD Occupation uplink lt 60 2 Level Critical From 2009 03 04 04 00 00 To Duration 10 00 00 Interval 15 min Measured values Parent name First value Measurement name Second value 10 0 22 252 Slot 2 Air Link Occupation Back Figure 7 3 Detailed Alarm Information User Manual Threshold Crossing Alarms Monitoring Navigating Viewing and Filtering Alarms ta Frid Fe 7 2 2 1 StarQuality Navigating Viewing and Filtering Alarms The browser at the left hand side of the user interface under the main menu is used to filter and arrange the alarms There are three groups in the Browser each controls the display of alarms The individual groups can be expanded or collapsed and by clicking on the button on the left edge next to them which can be useful since this panel has no scroll bar A tooltip is also displayed if the mouse pointer is moved above the group icon Filtering of alarms can only be set with these groups if a set of alarms is already selected on the top part of the screen The following sections explain in details the individual groups Viewin
3. Chapter Reports Reports In this chapter StarQuality Overview on page 195 Report Configuration on page 196 Viewing Reports on page 207 Bulk Export Wizard Exporting Data to XLS Files on page 210 User Manual Reports Overview 8 1 Overview StarQuality enables the following types of reports E Built in and configurable reports E Filtered data exported to xls format 8 1 1 Built in Reports These reports are variable evaluations on a chosen set of sampled objects AUs SUs measurements in the system Administrator users can configure selected subsets variables and reports views Each report can be one of the following E Predefined reports The system is installed containing the same set of four reports for most device types BottomN Uptime TopN Air Link Utilization not applicable to BreezeACCESS VL and Extreme TopN Sector Throughput TopN Number of Connected SUs For details on device specific information refer to Chapter 11 E Regular reports Each report view is manually configured following the definitions of its variables and begins collecting data from its creation time and on Refer to Regular Reports on page 196 E On demand reports Creation and generation of reports referring to data already existing in the database Refer to On Demand Reports on page 202 StarQuality User Manual Reports Report Configuration
4. Disclaimer StarQuality a The Software is sold on an AS IS basis Alvarion its affiliates or its licensors MAKE NO WARRANTIES WHATSOEVER WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WITH RESPECT TO THE SOFTWARE AND THE ACCOMPANYING DOCUMENTATION ALVARION SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON INFRINGEMENT WITH RESPECT TO THE SOFTWARE UNITS OF PRODUCT INCLUDING ALL THE SOFTWARE DELIVERED TO PURCHASER HEREUNDER ARE NOT FAULT TOLERANT AND ARE NOT DESIGNED MANUFACTURED OR INTENDED FOR USE OR RESALE IN APPLICATIONS WHERE THE FAILURE MALFUNCTION OR INACCURACY OF PRODUCTS CARRIES A RISK OF DEATH OR BODILY INJURY OR SEVERE PHYSICAL OR ENVIRONMENTAL DAMAGE HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES MAY INCLUDE BUT ARE NOT LIMITED TO USE AS PART OF ON LINE CONTROL SYSTEMS IN HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTS REQUIRING FAIL SAFE PERFORMANCE SUCH AS IN THE OPERATION OF NUCLEAR FACILITIES AIRCRAFT NAVIGATION OR COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL LIFE SUPPORT MACHINES WEAPONS SYSTEMS OR OTHER APPLICATIONS REPRESENTING A SIMILAR DEGREE OF POTENTIAL HAZARD ALVARION SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY OF FITNESS FOR HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES b PURCHASER S SOLE REMEDY FOR BREACH OF THE EXPRESS WARRANTIES ABOVE SHALL BE REPLACEMENT OR REFUND OF THE PURCHASE PRICE AS SPECIFIED ABOVE AT ALVARION S OPTION TO THE d User Manual Legal Rights FULLEST EXTENT ALL
5. This chapter focuses on creating threshold templates and assigning them to equipment User Manual Setting Alarm Thresholds Creating and Editing Threshold Templates 6 2 Creating and Editing Threshold Templates Creating thresholds using a template enables the creation of more thresholds even for the same measurement First you create the template and then you assign it to a specific equipment You can also configure the assigned threshold locally 6 2 1 Creating a New Threshold Template This section describes how to create a new template not based on an existing one and how to configure it gt To create a new threshold template 1 From Settings select Templates gt Threshold Templates The Threshold Template Configuration list is displayed gt Browser 01 MIB upload 02 Measurement type definition Threshold template configuration 03 Equipment templates Threshold 04 Threshold templates erent ver ele ey 05 Chart templates edit del Occupation 06 Exclusion window templates del insts FDD SNMP OCCUPATION downlink lt Major Variable1 WiMAX FDD Air Link Occupation Table Downlink lt 50 0 ix in 1 sample 50 x lt equipi gt resp Host CPU usage gt x lt varl gt gt V riablei SNMP CPU usage Table gt INPUT1 ixin 1 sample I lt inputi gt edit del EE deli Host disc usage gt x lt varl gt gt _ Varieble1 SNMP Disc capacity
6. To use the Server Start Stop Status window 1 From Settings select Servers gt Start Stop Status A list of all servers is displayed Running servers are colored green Not running servers are colored red pr Alarms I Measurements b Reports Settings l Browser 2 01 Licences 02 Device and measurement summary 03 Server groups 04 Server configuration 05 Start Stop Status 06 Server events 07 Collector load Server start stop status 16 items found check all stop all Fi Status Type Server group Host d 9 Figure 9 21 Server Status 2 Click either Start or Stop to change the status or Check to manually check and refresh the status 9 6 6 Viewing Server Events The application manager module or modules if the secondary application manager is also installed periodically performs different verifications in connection with the database and the machines running StarQuality You can view the results of these verifications and the log entries created when modules are started or stopped StarQuality General Setting Options Collector Load gt To access the Event Server list From Settings select Servers gt Server Event The server events list is displayed lb Browser Servers D E Server events ice and measurement summary 03 Server groups OG 1500 04 Server configuration 05 Start Stop Status 06 Server event
7. If the user and the directory already exist but the installer cannot find a valid StarQuality installation in the directory then it asks whether it should continue or not If it finds a StarQuality it stops until all StarQuality modules are stopped The installer prompts for the installation type that is if you are installing an additional server Answer No to this prompt WARNING YOU SHOULD ONLY ANSWER YES TO THE FOLLOWING QUESTION WARNING IF YOU ARE INSTALLING AN ADDITIONAL COLLECTOR SERVER WARNING OR YOU ARE UPGRADING SUCH AN ADDITIONAL COLLECTOR SERVER QUESTION Are you installing a collector server Y N N 2 7 2 5 Apache Configuration If you are not installing a data collector the installer asks whether it should configure the Apache WEB server or you will configure it later This question is among the few yes no questions for which the installer stores the given answer and sets the default to your previous answer when running a second time and can accept this default answer in silent mode automatically StarQuality User Manual Installation 2 7 2 6 StarQuality Installing StarQuality If you answer Yes the installer asks for various Apache files and the port to be used and then configures it The default answers given to the user during the installation represent the answers for the default Apache installation acco
8. Introduction on page 10 Installing StarQuality on Windows Server with Internal Oracle Database on page 13 Installing StarQuality on Windows Server with External Oracle Database on the Same Machine on page 30 Installing StarQuality on Windows Server with Oracle Database on a Separate Machine on page 46 Installing StarQuality on Solaris Server with Internal Oracle Database on page 62 Installing StarQuality on Solaris Server with External Oracle Database on the Same Machine on page 71 Installing StarQuality on Solaris Server with Oracle Database on a Separate Machine on page 81 Running StarQuality on Windows on page 90 Additional Installation Information on page 95 StarQuality Upgrade on page 100 Uninstalling StarQuality on page 103 User Manual Installation Introduction FAR Introduction 2 1 1 Installation Types StarQuality can be installed on systems with internal or external databases and on systems running Windows and UNIX like operating systems This chapter is divided into sections according to the type of operating system and type of database installation The following are possible installation types depending on configuration E Installing StarQuality on Windows with internal Oracle Database with external Oracle Database on the same machine with Oracle Database on a separate machine E Installing StarQuality on Solaris with i
9. Pio CS User Manual Server group ro server group definied sl Collect data VW Additional measurements I add new Measurement type Name Other All types YI Index OK IV Active session 0 Active session IV Active session 0 SYS Active session Figure 4 10 Activating Data Collection Oracle 10 Change Server Group to Oracle and choose specific measurements or all measurements by selecting the corresponding check boxes 11 Scroll down and click OK to implement changes The Server field turns green which indicates that collection is active StarQuality Network Discovery Discovery of Equipment under a Server Health Site Name OR2 Connection xe User system Password SYSTEM password Right SYSDBA Server group Oracle server een Previous server None Collect data Yes Keep collected 365 data for days 15 min Created by admin Created when 2009 03 01 11 44 47 Last modified by admin Last modified at 2009 03 01 14 07 06 Figure 4 11 Data Collection Active Oracle gt To add equipment under the UNIX Linux site StarQuality Make sure the following prerequisites are available Setup and configuration Network connection between StarQuality and UNIX machines Information IP address of UNIX machine UNIX user name and password The prompt for the user used for discovery must have the following pattern end with a space or have a gt or character followed by a spa
10. StarQuality Threshold name Expression Validate Level Type E mail SNMP Trap Command Continuous alert When Creating a New Threshold Template Threshold template configuration OK Cancel Figure 6 2 Threshold Template Configuration New Fill in the fields with the following information Name Template name For example DD SNMP OCCUPATION too low Threshold name A unique and meaningful name For example FDD SNMP OCCUPATION lt 80 Expression The threshold format The application displays the expression in text format while editing the expression is displayed in its original form in case of normal thresholds and as different input fields for grouped alarms See Step 4 below Level The possible threshold values in decreasing severity levels Critical red background Major orange background Warning yellow background Minor cyan background User Manual Setting Alarm Thresholds Creating a New Threshold Template E Type Not applicable E E mail The e mail address es to which the application should send a message if there is threshold violation Select one or more e mail addresses by highlighting and using the CTRL and Shift keys the required address es from the predefined list refer to Setting E mail Addresses Admin only on page 243 A prerequisite for the actual e mail notifications is a
11. on page 130 Scheduled Configuration on page 142 User Manual Network Discovery Overview 4 1 StarQuality Overview At first login the system contains only a ROOT site You build your new network sites under the ROOT to be able to start monitoring your equipment performance using the StarQuality Mapping the network in StarQuality can be done using various structures such as by geographical locations by topics etc This section explains the creation ofa a WiMAX network and all the BTSs under it and creating a utility network Following are available site types E WiMAX equipment WiMAX FDD SNMP FDD versions 3 5 3 6 SNMP data collection Up to 10 SUs per BTS can be measured WiMAX FDD TFTP FDD version 3 7 TFTP data collection WiMAX TDD TDD versions 4 5 and later TFTP data collection 4Motion version 2 5M and 3 0 BreezeACCESS VL version 6 0 Up to 10 SUs per BTS can be measured Extreme version 1 5 HM Server Health AlvariSTAR Version 4 0 and later Oracle UNIX The measurements can be viewed not less than 30 minutes following the initial collection for each device For more information on configuration refer to Chapter 9 General Setting Options on page 216 O User Manual Network Discovery Overview gt To create a WiMAX network site under ROOT 1 From Settings select Site and Equipment Configuration 2 From the Creation drop down menu select C
12. symbol to browse to the selected site or equipment the elements under the selected equipment also appear in the currently active tab E Incase of many equipments click on a group to unfold it The system stays at the same level so clicking does not mean a hierarchy level has changed E Click Measurement Types to navigate the hierarchy and display only the elements that include the selected measurement type Operations Drop Down Menu Options The following functions are available for viewing measurement data see Figure 5 4 SU 00 12 CF 89 6 1 DE MCS Downlink Print page 55 Bit Bin Figure 5 4 Measurements Operation drop down Menu E Print Page sends the page to printer User Manual Viewing Measurements StarQuality Operations Drop Down Menu Options E Show history the application tracks the navigation of the user in the Measurements and in the Alarms menu and builds a history log from it Each tab has its own log and each log entry contains the visited object along with the used submenu and the selected date and time period You can view this history log and either go back to a previous entry by clicking on the view link or open it in a new tab by right clicking on the view link ROOT gt Regular Setups view Measurements ROOT ROOT gt Regular Setups gt 10 10 144 196 SUs gt BS 255 243 41 22 22 222 ee view Measurements ROOT ROOT gt Regular Setups gt 10 10 144 196 SUs eho v
13. the following message appears Windows Internet Explorer EG J The application based on your settings wants to display the charts as Flash objects but the required Flash 8 player had not been installed yet Do you want to download the Flash player now Cancel Figure 3 1 Flash Player Message Window You can install Flash to display data with Flash functionality If you do not install Flash the data is displayed without Flash features 3 You can proceed with discovering the network see Network Discovery on page 120 modify settings or start monitoring the equipment StarQuality 108 User Manual Getting Started Login StarQuality ae Critical 1 Major 0 Warring 0 Minor 0 Normal 0 Alarm sk SE e SEN EE E a e Overview Main menu Submenu panel Browser E Elements WW Big setups csc LAB Work Area Regular Setups 44 Measurement types Figure 3 2 The StarQuality User Interface StarQuality User Manual Getting Started i StarQuality The Structure of Interface Windows The Structure of Interface Windows The interface of the StarQuality application divides the browser window into several panels see Figure 3 2 E Alarm overview bar displays current alarms grouped by their severity level This also acts as a shortcut to the alarm screens The application displays only alarms that the user has permissions to view If access to alarms is unavailab
14. with internal Oracle database refer to Table 2 1 The installation has to be performed by a local administrator user During the installation the installer writes information into two destinations the Details view and the log file To display the Details view click Show Details in the installation wizard The log file is located in the Temp directory of the user by default C Documents and Settings lt USER gt Local Settings Temp User Manual Installation Installing StarQuality 2 2 2 2 StarQuality Installation Procedure 1 Ensure that the pre installation task are complete as required in Section 2 2 1 2 Do one of the following Insert the installation DVD into the DVD drive or Copy unzip the Installation folder directly onto one of the disk drives for example C IMPORTANT Do not place the installation files into a folder with a long path This is an Oracle installer limitation 3 Run the installation program starquality exe The installation wizard is displayed 8 StarQuality Setup Bisi E Welcome to the StarQuality Setup Wizard This wizard will guide you through the installation of StarQuality It is recommended that you close all other applications before starting Setup This will make it possible to update relevant system Files without having to reboot your computer Click Next to continue cael Figure 2 10 StarQuality Setup Wizard Window 4 Click Next the wizard displays a li
15. Description Position your mouse over Component EG see its description Select components to install Space required 185 6MB Nullsoft Install System v2 42 lt Back Cancel Figure 2 34 Choose Components 6 Click Next StarQuality installation starts To view detailed information click Show Details The content of the details view can be copied to the clipboard StarQuality User Manual Installation StarQuality Nullsoft Install System v2 37 Nullsoft Install System v2 37 Installing Please wait while StarQuality is being installed lel Es Installing StarQuality Execute setup exe q R C starquality Extract vim 7 1 1 tar bz2 100 Output folder C starqualityY installjcygwin mininstall from releaselw32api Extract w32api 3 11 1 tar bz2 100 Output folder C starquality _install cyguwin_min install_From release which Extract which 2 19 1 tar bz2 Output folder C starquality _install cyguwin_min install_from release zlib Extract zlib 1 2 3 2 tar bz2 100 Output folder C starquality install Cygwin Install Output folder C starqualityY installjcygwin min Output folder C starquality installjcygwin min Execute setup exe q R C starquality a Figure 2 35 StarQuality Installing The last page indicates that the basic installation is done lel Es StarQuality basic installation complete Press Next to continue with the remainin
16. In this chapter StarQuality System Overview on page 3 System Data Structure on page 5 System Data Structure on page 5 User Types and Their Settings on page 6 User Manual Introduction 1 1 1 1 1 11 2 StarQuality System Overview System Overview General Alvarion s StarQuality is a carrier class performance and traffic monitoring system designed for optimizing the WiMAX Network performance identifying network problems maximizing traffic capacity and optimizing resource allocation StarQuality offers an end to end performance solution including collection analyzing storing and displaying of the performance data The system provides a unified performance application for monitoring Alvarion s WiMAX equipment as well as server health StarQuality provides various sets of report types and lists through an intuitive and simple Web GUI client It also enables defining TCA Threshold Crossing Alerts mechanism an alarm generation may be conditional to the occurrence of several rule violations Alvarion s StarQuality is an essential element for optimizing the WiMAX Network functionality radio planning ensuring service performance and problem identification STAR Management Suite Overview Alvarion s STAR Management Suite offers complete and comprehensive management solution for ensuring the successful deployment of WiMAX services The Alvarion STAR Management Suite offers a set of carr
17. O E 10 Change Server Group to Unix Linux and choose specific measurements or all measurements by selecting the corresponding check boxes 11 Scroll down and click OK to implement changes The Server field turns green which implies that collection is active StarQuality User Manual Network Discovery StarQuality Name IP address User Password Server group Server Previous server Collect data Keep collected data for days Default measurement interval Created by Created when Last modified by Last modified at Discovery of Equipment under a Server Health Site 216 172 30 105 216 dadmin idadmin Unoylinux UnnlimarColener None Yes 365 15 min admin 2009 03 01 14 21 15 admin 2009 03 01 14 31 50 Figure 4 15 Data Collection Active UNIX Oo User Manual Network Discovery 4 4 StarQuality Scheduled Configuration Scheduled Configuration In case the equipment is not available when you edit the configuration discovery you can display the configuration details using the Scheduled Configuration page from Settings Restricted administrators can view or edit a scheduled configuration only if they have permission to its parent site To set the equipment for scheduled discovery 1 Follow the steps in To perform actual discovery on page 125 with the following change Template name WiMAX FDD C Equipment Creation Job Job crea
18. Back Cancel Figure 2 12 Choose Components 6 Click Next StarQuality installation starts To view detailed information click Show Details The content of the details view can be copied to the clipboard StarQuality User Manual Installation Installing StarQuality lel Es Installing Please wait while StarQuality is being installed Execute setup exe q R C starquality Extract vim 7 1 1 tar bz2 100 Output folder C starqualityY installjcygwin mininstall from releaselw32api Extract w32api 3 11 1 tar bz2 100 Output folder C starquality _install cyguwin_min install_From release which Extract which 2 19 1 tar bz2 Output folder C starquality _install cyguwin_min install_from release zlib Extract zlib 1 2 3 2 tar bz2 100 Output folder C starquality install Cygwin Install Output folder C starqualityY installjcygwin min Output folder C starquality installjcygwin min Execute setup exe q R C starquality a Nullsoft Install System v2 37 Figure 2 13 StarQuality Installing The last page indicates that the basic installation is done lel Es StarQuality basic installation complete Press Next to continue with the remaining installation steps Completed Apache stopped Add firewall port StarQuality WEB TCP 80 Wed Nov 5 17 24 27 2008 alert httpd Could not determine the server s fully qual Apache is running Configuring StarQuality A
19. However the restricted administrators can modify these objects Only those site equipment measurement threshold threshold type and exclusion window objects for which they have received privileges Can only modify a user if it was created by themselves Can only view an entry in the audit log if the change was made by themselves Can only modify a public virtual hierarchy object or a public chart if it was created by themselves Cannot modify templates except the exclusion windows reports servers events and maps E Normal users cannot modify the base objects in the system and can view only those objects that they have received privileges for They can set User Manual Introduction StarQuality User Types and Their Settings preferences create private virtual hierarchies and charts and can modify their own passwords E Limited users Similar to normal users but they cannot change their passwords cannot set preferences and cannot create private virtual hierarchies and charts Any administrator has the right to modify normal users while only the admin user can modify administrators Restricted administrators cannot modify a user except if it was created by themselves No user can delete the admin user For further information refer to the User Administration Admin only on page 261 User Manual chante gt E Installation Installation In this chapter StarQuality
20. Map i Yo oe Zone Zone stop it Motion Number Of Connected SUs Number Of Connected SUs gs Yes 900 Yes edit ber Of d ber Of d Gs Motion UL Air Link Utilization Data UL Air Link Utilization Data pen Non edit ae Sane Yes 900 cep Yes ii Motion UL Air Link Utilization UL Air Link Utilization Non edit ane Feedhark Jane SS ao SSES Figure 8 1 Report Variables Window Example StarQuality User Manual Reports Regular Reports gt To create a report variable 1 Click add new the following window is displayed I Browser Reports 4 lolx 01 Report variables z D 02 Report views Report variable configuration 03 Scheduled reports Variable Measurement name Additional query i D Site name Slam Contains T Add to Test first 100 hit Detailed summary at D equipment level Active Vv When Je tes SZ OK Cancel Figure 8 2 Adding a New Report Variable 2 Enter a unique and meaningful name for the variable The name should reflect the device type as well as the measurement For example TDD Utilization 3 Select a Measurement Name from the drop down list The list is based on measurements per collector equipment type Make sure to select the measurement from the correct collector 4 Leave Detailed summary at equipment level unchecked 5 Verify that the Active check box is selected 6 Leave the interval of 15min 7 When Select the required timeframe
21. StarQuality User Manual Device Specific Information Key Performance Indicators KPIs Table 11 16 Traffic Counters 4Motion Ver 3 0 Continued Counter Members Description Uplink HARQ Packet 11 MCS values from Error rate of dropped packets after HARQ of each Error Rate Dropped MCS per BS for the uplink direction HARQ Sub Bursts QPSK 1 2 Pepe To 64 QAM 5 6 And Total MIR CIR Provisioned Uplink This KPI shows aggregation of maximum Bits per Second provisioned traffic during the 15 minutes period Downlink Value is calculated based on aggregation of Number Of Connected Value Number of SUs that have been connected to the SUs Count BS for the whole 15 minute interval proceeding the PMTM file generation UL Noise Median Uplink The median extracted from the actual noise flow dBm histogram 11 5 3 2 NPU KPIs There are KPIs that are relevant only for NPUs working in non transparent mode You can find the items relevant for non transparent mode in the release notes Table 11 17 NPU Counters Counter Members Description Comments ASN GW MS Authentication Rejections Sample of MSs in ASNGW KPI Registration Count ASNGW in 15 min Created Service Flows Qty Min and Max shows the tide mark in 15 min Max Registered MSs duration Failed Initial NE Min Registered MSs Registered MSs Qty Succeeded Initial NE StarQuality 297 User Manual Device Specific Inf
22. StarQuality User Manual Installation Installing StarQuality isi Es License Agreement Please review the license terms before installing StarQuality Press Page Down to see the rest of the agreement This program contains free of charge third party Java Perl and NSIS software libraries as well a Cygwin running environment The detailed list of components the detailed license files and sources can be Found in the third party directory on the installer CD By clicking I Agree you acknowledge that your use of these software is governed by the terms of the respective program licenses SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT the Agreement READ CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THE SOFTWARE vi If you accept the terms of the agreement click I Agree to continue You must accept the agreement to install StarQuality Nullsoft Install System v2 42 lt Back Cancel Figure 2 52 Licence Agreement 4 Click Next the wizard displays components to install M StarQuality Setup Mile x Choose Components Choose which features of StarQuality you want to install Check the components you want to install and uncheck the components you don t want to install Click Next to continue Description Position your mouse over component EG see its description Select components to install Space required 185 6MB Nullsoft Install System v2 42 lt Back Cancel Figure 2 53 Choose Components 5
23. Table 11 1 BTS Configuration Requirements Requirement FDD FDD TDD SNMP TFTP Collection Interval Setting 900 sec rbCollectionStatisticsinterval StarQuality registered as Authorised Manager Traps disabled PM TM Collection Activated Mode Basic 275 User Manual Device Specific Information Key Performance Indicators KPIs Table 11 1 BTS Configuration Requirements Continued Requirement FDD FDD TDD SNMP TFTP PM TM Collection Contents 11 2 3 Key Performance Indicators KPIs 11 2 3 1 BS KPIs Each of the following is available for both Downlink DL and Uplink UL Table 11 2 FDD and TDD Traffic BS KPIs Counter Description Air Link Utilization The utilization of available wireless link resources Total used symbols during the collection period as a percentage of total symbols available Total symbols Qty used Air Link Utilizati 100 ENE Total symbols available Subscription The throughput based on the total traffic rate taking into account the unusable gap period in each frame as a percentage of total provisioned MIR The higher this value the higher is the actual utilization by users of the provisioned MIR Subscription E H Constant throughput gt 0 then Throughput Const throughput 100 x X CIR amp MIR E Otherwise Throughput 100 x S CIR amp MIR Constant throuput Thr
24. but in case of public and private charts the value given here is used 4 Click OK The modifications is saved and the page is refreshed with the modified data Customizing Public Admin only and Private Menu Items You can create shortcut menu items under the Alarms and Measurements main menus To edit a menu item 1 From the Settings gt Customization select Public Private Menu Items The Menu Item Configuration page is displayed NOTE The menu item configuration can also be performed from the Alarms and Measurements main menu items after selecting the object select the Save as Submenu action the Operation pull down menu on the right hand side see also Saving Items as A Submenu on page 161 I Browser 01 Public charts 02 Public menu items 03 External links 04 E mail addresses StarQuality Customization Menu item configuration add new Type Name For the Measurements menu For the Alarms menu edit del Equipment SU 00 10 E7 22 0F 1E No Yes Figure 9 10 Menu Item Configuration 2 Click edit The following page is displayed 236 User Manual General Setting Options Customizing Public Admin only and Private Menu Items Menu item configuration Type Equipment Name SU 00 10 E7 22 0F 1E For the Measurements r menu For the Alarms menu VW OK Cancel Figure 9 11 Menu Item Editing 3 Set the menu in which the edited menu item will be displayed For charts only
25. lt gt lt reference value gt lt frequency gt You can also have relations between expressions Or And Examples Name Subscription downlink gt 100 for FDD SNMP Syntax VAR1 O WMP IN gt 100 0 1 1 StarQuality User Manual Setting Alarm Thresholds Creating a New Threshold Template Meaning Variable value 1 0 WMP subscription measurement downlink should be greater than 100 at least once per one measurement Syntax VAR1 0 WOCC OUT lt 50 0 1 1 for FDD SNMP Validation Variablel WiMAX FDD Air Link Occupation Table Downlink lt 50 0 1x in 1 sample Syntax VAR1 0 TOCC IN lt 70 0 2 3 for FDD and VAR1 0 TOCC OUT lt 50 0 3 3 Validation Variablel WiMAX TDD Air Link Utilization Table Uplink lt 70 0 2x in 3 samples and Variable1 WiMAX TDD Air Link Utilization Table Downlink lt 50 0 3x in 3 samples For lists of syntax elements for thresholds refer to Chapter 11 Usually only the following part of the Perl syntax is necessary and and expression or or expression mathematical operations punctuation logical negation lt gt gt value comparators Alternatively you can create the template without expression and later edit the threshold locally using input field See detailed information in Generating the Expression Using Input Fields on page 179 5 Click Validate If the syntax is red fix it according to the
26. or upgrade packages as necessary Cc Setup exe version 2 573 2 3 Copyright 2000 2007 http www cygwin com Figure 2 23 Cygwin Net Release Setup Program window 4 Click Next The Choose a Download Source window is displayed Cygwin Setup Choose Installation Type oj x Choose A Download Source Choose whether to install or download from the internet or install from files in Lg a local directory Install from Internet downloaded files will be kept for future re use Download Without Installing lt Back Cancel Figure 2 24 Choose a Download Source Window StarQuality User Manual Installation Pre installation Tasks 5 Select Install from Local directory Click Next Cygwin Setup Choose Installation Directory Bisi ES Select Root Install Directory Select the directory where you want to install Cygwin Also choose a few installation parameters Root Directory Browse Install For Default Text File Type Ze All Users RECOMMENDED e Unix binary RECOMMENDED Cygwin will be available to all users of No line translation done all files opened the system NOTE This is required if in binary mode Files on disk will have you wish to run services like sshd etc LF line endings C Just Me C DOS text Cygwin will only be available to the Line endings will be translated from unix current user Only select this if you lack LF to DOS CR LF on write and vice A
27. 10 184 43 2500 BS 9 9 9 00 12 CF C3 DA FD Vv 4Motion 10 10 184 43 10 10 184 43 2500 BS 9 9 9 00 12 CF C3 FB 3C Figure 8 22 SU Selection NOTE HK For Steps 8 through 10 the Select All check box refers only to the currently displayed page For selecting all the results in all pages select the checkbox separately on each page 11 Click Export in the selection path The following message is displayed Windows Internet Explorer x After clicking on the OK button the application will start to generate the Excel file This might take several minutes please do not navigate away and do not close your browser Figure 8 23 Export Message 12 Click OK In certain cases a second message is displayed informing that the data may exceed 66 000 lines Click OK A standard File Save Download window is displayed The default file naming format is StarQuality lt Report Name gt lt Date gt lt Time gt Report name is defined in Step 2 StarQuality User Manual 9 Chapter General Setting Options General Setting Options In this chapter StarQuality Overview on page 218 Search Admin only on page 221 Site and Equipment Configuration on page 222 Customization on page 233 Templates admin only on page 245 Server Configuration and Management Admin only on page 246 Audit Trail on page 258 User Administration Admin only on page 261 User Manual General Set
28. 1F view WiMAX FDD SU RSSI Table SU 00 10 E7 22 90 1F RSSI Equipment SU 00 10 E7 22 90 1F view WiMAX FDD SU SNR Table SU 00 10 E7 22 90 1F SNR Equipment SU 00 10 E7 22 90 1F view WIMAX FDD SU RATE Table SU 00 10 E7 22 90 34 RATE Equipment SU 00 10 E7 22 90 34 view WiMAX FDD SU RSSI Table SU 00 10 E7 22 90 24 RSSI Equipment SU 00 10 7 22 90 34 view WiMAX FDD SU SNR Table SU 00 10 E7 22 90 34 SNR Equipment SU 00 10 E7 22 90 34 of If the results contain only measurements or charts to display them together click on the view all link A page containing the charts is displayed charts click Save as Virtual Equipment NOTE To create a virtual equipment containing the displayed list of measurements or This method can substitute the manual selection of measurements and charts under the Customization menu item User Manual Viewing Measurements Saving Items as A Submenu 5 7 StarQuality Saving Items as A Submenu You can create a submenu item under the Measurements menu in order to have a shortcut to a selected item This may save navigation time and searching for data See also Customizing Public Admin only and Private Menu Items on page 236 To create a submenu item 1 Click the equipment icon you want to create a shortcut to 2 From the Operations drop down menu select Save As Submenu 3 Specify if this menu item should appear in Measurement or Alarms or both menus 4 Click OK
29. 4 Click Next The Choose a Download Source window is displayed Cygwin Setup Choose Installation Type oj x Choose A Download Source Choose whether to install or download from the internet or install from files in Lg a local directory Install from Internet downloaded files will be kept for future re use Download Without Installing lt Back Cancel Figure 2 2 Choose a Download Source Window StarQuality User Manual Installation Pre installation Tasks 5 Select Install from Local directory Click Next Cygwin Setup Choose Installation Directory Bisi ES Select Root Install Directory Select the directory where you want to install Cygwin Also choose a few installation parameters Root Directory Browse Install For Default Text File Type Ze All Users RECOMMENDED e Unix binary RECOMMENDED Cygwin will be available to all users of No line translation done all files opened the system NOTE This is required if in binary mode Files on disk will have you wish to run services like sshd etc LF line endings C Just Me C DOS text Cygwin will only be available to the Line endings will be translated from unix current user Only select this if you lack LF to DOS CR LF on write and vice Admin privileges or you have specific versa on read needs Read more about file modes lt Back Cancel Figure 2 3 Select Root Install Directory 6 Choo
30. Active MSs Qty Active MS Idle MS Idle MSs Ratio Ratio of gauges mentioned above Ratio Active MSs Ratio Air Link Utilization All The utilization of available wireless link resources Data utilization from all slots including MAP not including preamble and TTG RTG per BS as a DL Data Zone percentage of total slots available for the uplink and downlink directions UL Data Zone DL Map Zone StarQuality User Manual Device Specific Information Key Performance Indicators KPIs Table 11 16 Traffic Counters 4Motion Ver 3 0 Continued Counter Members Description Average Provisioned RT CIR Counts the provisioned DL based on registered Downlink bits per RT MIR MSs per second The graphs are per QoS The second calculation divides the accumulated value with 900 UGS CIR seconds eRT CIR eRT MIR nRT CIR nRT MIR BE MIR Average Provisioned BE MIR Counts the provisioned UL based on registered Uplink bits per second AT CIR MSs per second The graphs are per QoS The calculation divides the accumulated value with 900 RT MIR seconds UGS CIR eRT CIR eRT MIR nRT CIR nRT MIR BS Traffic Type DL MIMO A Ratio DL MIMO B Ratio DL MIMO CDD Ratio DL MIMO BF Ratio Ratio is based on number of bursts counted in the sampled period Burst Error Rate Downlink count Succeeded transfer Qty Dropped Qty Repetitions Counts the actual numbers of bursts in th
31. BURSTS 100 11 6 4 Codes for Threshold Setting 11 6 4 1 BTS Codes Table 11 25 BTS Codes Code Parameter CIR Allocated eBSe CIR related Over Subscription Ratio eBSg Drop Ratio eBSb MIR Allocated eBSf MIR related Over Subscription Ratio eBSh Number Of Connected SUs eCS Repetition Ratio eBSc Throughput eT Transfer Ratio eBSa Transfer overhead eBSd Uptime eUPT 11 6 4 2 SU Codes Table 11 26 SU Codes Code Parameter SU CIR Allocated eSUe SU Drop Ratio eSUb SU MIR Allocated eSUf StarQuality D User Manual Device Specific Information 11 6 5 StarQuality Table 11 26 SU Codes Continued Default Built in Reports Code Parameter SU RATE AVERAGE eSU9 SU RATE MAX eSU8 SU RATE MIN eSU7 SU RSSI AVERAGE eSU6 SU RSSI MAX eSU5 SU RSSI MIN eSU4 SU Repetition Ratio eSUc SU SNR AVERAGE eSU3 SU SNR MAX eSU2 SU SNR MIN eSU1 SU Throughput eSUg SU Transfer Ratio eSUa SU Transfer overhead eSUd Default Built in Reports E BottomN Uptime E TopN Number of Connected SUs E TopN throughput User Manual Glossary Glossary StarQuality The following terms are frequently used in this manual AU Access Unit BS Base Station BTS Base Transceiver Station CIR Committed Information Rate CINR Carrier to Interference plus Noise Ratio CPE
32. Ch StarQuality Installing StarQuality E To test connectivity to the database server from the StarQuality machine use the sqlplus utility as follows Assuming that the database SID is testme and system password is oracle switch to the command prompt on Windows or use a console on Solaris logged in as the Oracle user and enter the following command sqlplus system oracle testme Enter exit or quit to complete the procedure E The following Oracle database information should be available when installing the StarQuality Oracle Database server IP Service name SID TNS Password for SYSTEM use Installing StarQuality StarQuality can be installed on a Solaris 10 x86 operating system using the command line installer For additional information on the installer commands and parameters refer to Command Line Installer General Information on page 96 All operations should be done while logged in as root user To install StarQuality Solaris 1 Run the installer application StarQuality v3 0 en bin either directly from the installation DVD or from a directory to which the file was transferred using FTP 2 Follow the next sections for installation details Basic Checks The installer checks the following details User Manual Installation Installing StarQuality E Version of the operating system E Required packages E Version of Perl and the options used to build the Perl
33. Click Next StarQuality installation starts To view detailed information click Show Details The content of the details view can be copied to the clipboard StarQuality Q User Manual Installation StarQuality Nullsoft Install System v2 37 Nullsoft Install System v2 37 Installing Please wait while StarQuality is being installed lel Es Installing StarQuality Execute setup exe q R C starquality Extract vim 7 1 1 tar bz2 100 Output folder C starqualityY installjcygwin mininstall from releaselw32api Extract w32api 3 11 1 tar bz2 100 Output folder C starquality _install cyguwin_min install_From release which Extract which 2 19 1 tar bz2 Output folder C starquality _install cyguwin_min install_from release zlib Extract zlib 1 2 3 2 tar bz2 100 Output folder C starquality install Cygwin Install Output folder C starqualityY installjcygwin min Output folder C starquality installjcygwin min Execute setup exe q R C starquality a Figure 2 54 StarQuality Installing The last page indicates that the basic installation is done lel Es StarQuality basic installation complete Press Next to continue with the remaining installation steps Completed Apache stopped Add firewall port StarQuality WEB TCP 80 Wed Nov 5 17 24 27 2008 alert httpd Could not determine the server s fully qual Apache is running Configuring StarQuality Ad
34. Continued Code Parameter MCS Distribution 16QAM 1 2 MIMO B 4D14 MCS Distribution 16QAM 3 4 4D07 MCS Distribution 16QAM 3 4 MIMO B 4D15 MCS Distribution 64QAM 1 2 4D08 MCS Distribution 64QAM 1 2 MIMO B 4D16 MCS Distribution 64QAM 2 3 4D09 MCS Distribution 64QAM 2 3 MIMO B 4D17 MCS Distribution 64QAM 3 4 4D10 MCS Distribution 64QAM 3 4 MIMO B 4D18 MCS Distribution 64QAM 5 6 4D11 MCS Distribution 64QAM 5 6 MIMO B 4D19 MCS Distribution QPSK 1 2 4D04 MCS Distribution QPSK 1 2 MIMO B 4D12 MCS Distribution QPSK 1 2 Rep 2 4D03 MCS Distribution QPSK 1 2 Rep 4 4D02 MCS Distribution QPSK 1 2 Rep 6 4D01 MCS Distribution QPSK 3 4 4D05 MCS Distribution QPSK 3 4 MIMO B 4D13 MIR CIR Provisioned 4MC Max Registered MSs HANTK Max Spectral Efficiency all MSs 4SEM Min Registered MSs 4NTj NE failure Ratio 4NTg Number Of Connected SUs 4CS Registered MSs Qty 4019 Repetition Ratio 4013 Repetitions 4028 Sounding Resources 4018 Sounding Resources utilization Ratio 4010 Subscription Ratio 4SR Succeed Ho Attempts 4029 User Manual Device Specific Information StarQuality Codes for Threshold Setting Table 11 19 4Motion BS Threshold Codes Continued Code Parameter Succeed Ho Attempts Ratio 4014 Succeed Initial NE 4022 Succeed In
35. Customer Premises Equipment Equipment the basic sampled unit Two types of equipment are used in the StarQuality system AU Slot BS Sector in TDD or FDD only SU CPE MS HARQ Hybrid Automatic Repeated Request MCS Modulation Coding Scheme MIR Maximum Information Rate MS Mobile Subscriber NBI Northbound Interface Public Private objects Public objects sites etc are created by the admin user for the whole system Private object are created by the local user for the local system only ROOT Site the basic system network site under which you can create sites and virtual sites RSSI Received Signal Strength Indication SINR Signal Interference Noise Ratio User Manual Glossary E SNR Signal to Noise Ratio E SOAP Simple Object Access Protocol interface to enable various NBI operations via third party applications E Site Non virtual A base station containing up to 7 AUs on which measurements are collected Virtual Site any collection of equipments grouped by various subjects such as areas E SU Subscriber Unit D XLS Excel file format StarQuality User Manual
36. Information In this chapter StarQuality Introduction on page 274 BreezeMAX FDD and TDD Equipment on page 275 BreezeACCESS VL on page 280 4Motion Ver 2 5 on page 287 4Motion Ver 3 0 on page 293 BreezeMAX Extreme on page 307 User Manual Device Specific Information Introduction Lisl StarQuality Introduction This chapter provides device specific information regarding software compatibility and limitations traffic and performance counters codes for thresholds and default built in reports This information may help you focus on the details required for each equipment type when using StarQuality KPIs Key Performance Indicators exist for three types of entities HM Slot also referred to as AU sector BS E SU also referred to as MS CPE HM NPU also referred to as BTS in common measurements Q User Manual Device Specific Information BreezeMAX FDD and TDD Equipment i Ek NZ StarQuality BreezeMAX FDD and TDD Equipment Overview E The information in this section is common to the following equipment types BreezeMAX FDD SNMP BreezeMAX FDD BreezeMAX TDD E SW Compatibility FDD 3 5 3 6 SNMP based collection FDD 3 7 TDD 4 5 4 6 Refer to the Release Notes for specific Firmware versions HM Collector type FDD 3 5 3 6 WiMAX FDD SNMP FDD 3 7 WiMAX FDD TFTP TDD WiMAX TDD Network Discovery Prerequisites
37. Manual Viewing Measurements Display deleted Elements StarQuality Figure 5 10 Measurements Search Results To use the Search results in Measurements 1 To display the found objects click view On Searching in General view all Type Name Parent type Parentname view WiMAX FDD SU RATE Table SU 00 10 E7 22 0F 1E RATE Equipment SU 00 10 E7 22 0F 1E view WiMAX FDD SU RSSI Table SU 00 10 E7 22 0F 1E RSSI Equipment SU 00 10 E7 22 0F 1E view WiMAX FDD SU SNR Table SU 00 10 E7 22 0F 1E SNR Equipment SU 00 10 E7 22 0F 1E view WIMAX FDD SU RATE Table SU 00 10 E7 22 0F 69 RATE Equipment SU 00 10 E7 22 0F 69 view WiMAX FDD SU RSSI Table SU 00 10 E7 22 0F 69 RSSI Equipment SU 00 10 E7 22 0F 49 view WIMAX FDD SU SNR Table SU 00 10 E7 22 0F 69 SNR Equipment SU 00 10 E7 22 0F 69 view WiMAX FDD SU RATE Table SU 00 10 E7 22 57 58 RATE Equipment SU 00 10 E7 22 57 58 view WIMAX FDD SU RSSI Table SU 00 10 E7 22 57 58 RSSI Equipment SU 00 10 E7 22 57 58 view WiMAX FDD SU SNR Table SU 00 10 E7 22 57 58 SNR Equipment SU 00 10 E7 22 57 58 view WIMAX FDD SU RATE Table SU 00 10 7 22 58 16 RATE Equipment SU 00 10 E7 22 58 16 view WiMAX FDD SU RSSI Table SU 00 10 7 22 58 16 RSSI Equipment SU 00 10 E7 22 58 16 view WiMAX FDD SU SNR Table SU 00 10 E7 22 58 16 SNR Equipment SU 00 10 E7 22 58 16 view WiMAX FDD SU RATE Table SU 00 10 E7 22 90 1F RATE Equipment SU 00 10 E7 22 90
38. Measurements on page 149 Measurements Browsing Options on page 150 Measurements Display Options on page 151 Viewing Measurement Data on page 155 Searching Measurements on page 158 Saving Items as A Submenu on page 161 Setting Trendlines to Graphs on page 162 User Manual Viewing Measurements Introduction 5 1 Introduction Viewing measurements is available using a configurable quick menu at the top panel for displaying and navigation New elements can be added to the page using the Settings gt Customization menu see Customization on page 233 The Browser is also available for displaying navigation and filtering in the site equipment measurement hierarchy and it shows the measurements according to the measurement type Only those objects sites equipments or measurements for which the user has permissions are accessible The figure below shows the Browser and the Icon view of the selected hierarchy level Root ROOT operation 3 1 Display deleted IN e N Elements 1 Big setups o 6 Regular Setups gt Big setups Regular Setups Measurement types Figure 5 1 The Measurements Main Menu Item with the Browser and the Icon View The structure of sites is illustrated in the following figure StarQuality D User Manual Viewing Measurements Introduction Figure 5 2 Hierarchy of Sites StarQuality User Manual Viewing
39. Running StarQuality on Solaris on page 88 User Manual Installation 2 8 oak StarQuality Running StarQuality Running StarQuality Running StarQuality on Windows To start the server following initial installation 1 Open a Cygwin shell and enter the command by default it is not required to start it manually usr sbin apachectl start NOTE If the Apache is started this way the Cygwin shell should remain open Closing it will cause the Apache service to shut down 2 Open a web browser and go to http lt ip or hostname gt 3 Enter User Name and Password The default admin users credentials are admin adminl23 The StarQuality opening window is displayed for a few seconds and then the main interface window opens 4 From Settings select Servers gt Licenses The Licences Configuration window is displayed The entries marked red indicate missing or invalid licences that should be replaced 5 If necessary load a new license file using the WEB GUI See To load a licence on page 93 6 Do one of the following E Inthe computer service management window myComputer gt Manage gt Services start the services CYGWIN sshd and StarQuality service E Inthe WEB GUI from Settings select Servers gt Start Stop Status click start all Wait for the list to refresh E Return to the cygwin shell and enter the command User Manual Installation Running StarQuality on Windows o
40. Save Options EE 205 Figure 8 14 On demand Reports Show EE 206 Figure 8 15 Calendar views day week month and year for selecting the time interval 208 Figure 8 16 Bulk Export Wizard WiIndOW issiccsicicsesccscexesastencsreesaaraensnntaetaeersdnessdstesontensedieavennceeds 210 Figure 8 17 Bulk Export Wizard Filtering Devices ernnnnnnnrnnnnvvvenennrrvrnnnnnnnvnvnnvenenennnnnnnnnn 211 Figure 8 18 Exported ner eee ae 212 StarQuality User Manual Figures Figure 8 19 Export Message isc sun Sies egen ege egener oxoxaddusaseadecnsnanehgecccacadbeeausveuanscteesia 212 Figure 8 20 File Download E 213 Figure 8 21 Sample E inira aiaa a E EEEE AE a A EEES 213 el EE 215 Figure 8 23 Export Message aca sss setae Se Scere Ses eectgaed ne 215 Figure 9 1 Site and Equipment Configuration Window with Operations Drop down Menu 225 Figure 9 2 Adding a New Site eessen Eege 226 Figure 9 3 Equipment Discovery Message rrrnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennenennnnnnnnnnnnnn 227 Figure 9 4 Equipment Modification VWmmdow 227 Figure 9 5 Viewing Equipment with Additional Equipment Parameters rrrrrnnnrnonnnnrrrrnnnnnnnn 229 Figure 9 6 Virtual Equipment Modification ssicccdicscssnccasecscssarsccteceasaieetescettenessgeceneeensneceesatneneds 230 Figure 9 7 Virtual Equipment Modification Il errrnnnonennnnnnvnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnennnnn 231 Figure 9 8 Virtual Equipment Modifica
41. StarQuality Q User Manual Installation 2 6 2 6 1 2 6 1 1 StarQuality Installing StarQuality on Solaris Server with External Oracle Database on the Same Machine Installing StarQuality on Solaris Server with External Oracle Database on the Same Machine Before beginning the StarQuality installation refer to Table 2 1 to ensure that this is the correct installation for your system Check that you have performed all the tasks outlined in Section 2 6 1 below This installation type involves configuration of the Solaris kernel parameters and the installation of the following components HM Oracle server Oracle client is not required E StarQuality Pre installation Tasks Disk Partitioning For medium network configurations containing no more than 350 BTSs or 50 000 CPEs disk partitioning is recommended as described in the following table Table 2 11 Disk Partitioning Physical Disk Volume Setup Physical disk 1 Volume 1 OS StarQuality SW Oracle SW Physical disk 2 Volume 2 RAID 0 Oracle tablespaces redo logs etc entire SID Physical disk 3 Physical disk 4 For large network configurations containing no more than 1000 BTSs or 250 000 CPEs disk partitioning is recommended as described in the following table Note that the HDDs have a capacity of 500 GB GN User Manual Installation 2 6 1 2 2 6 1 3 StarQuality Table 2 12 Disk Partitioning Pre inst
42. TNS the TNS name to be used for the database connection as appears in the tnsnames ora file on the StarQuality machine E Host and port IP of the Oracle database server and port used for connecting to it Port default is 1521 E Service name and SID only one of them needs to be filled in preferably the Service name E System password and Confirm password the password of the SYSTEM user in the database The password is only used by the installer for the creation of the database user and table spaces the installer does not store it 9 Click Next Oracle Connection continues with Oracle tablespace parameters M starquality Setup ME E 9 Conf tablespace SO CONF File CHORACLEIPRODUCT 10 2 DORADATALORCLISQ CONF dbf Size 300M Oracle connection Please fill in the Oracle tablespace parameters Data tablespace 5Q DATA File C JORACLEIPRODUCT110 2 0JORADATAJORCLISQ DATA dbF Size 10000M Nullsoft Install System v2 37 Cancel Figure 2 58 Oracle Connection Tablespace Parameters 10 Click Next The user parameters are displayed StarQuality User Manual Installation Installing StarQuality M starQuality Setup Dis E Oracle connection Please fill in the Oracle user parameters User name 5Q User password ee Confirm password oe Nullsoft Install System v2 37 Cancel Figure 2 59 Oracle Connection User Parameters 11 Click Next The installer
43. Throughput 4NTb R6 Total CIR 4NTE R6 Total MIR 4NTe Registered MSs Qty 4NTI Service Flow usage Ratio 4NTi Succeed Initial NE 4NTm Uptime 4UPT cntNpuBckhIPort 4NT5 cntNpuBearer 4NT1 cntNpuCascPort 4NT4 cntNpuExtMgmt HANT2 cntNpulntMgmt 4NT3 11 5 4 3 SU Codes Table 11 21 SU Threshold Codes Code Parameter Aggregated Throughput H4SUa MCS Avg 4SU6 MCS Max 4SU5 MCS Min 4SU4 MS BF Ratio 4SUe MS Drop Ratio 4SUg StarQuality User Manual Device Specific Information 11 5 5 StarQuality Table 11 21 SU Threshold Codes Default Built in Reports Code Parameter MS Dropped Bursts Qty 4SUj MS MIMO A Ratio 4SUc MS MIMO B Ratio 4SUd MS Repetition Ratio 4SUh MS Repetitions 4SUk MS Succeed Transfer Ratio 4SUf MS Succeed Transferred Bursts Qty 4SUi SINR Avg 4SU3 Total Transferred Bursts 4SUb Uplink RSSI Avg 4SU9 Uplink RSSI Max 4SU8 Uplink RSSI Min 4SU7 Default Built in Reports E BottomN Uptime E TopN Air Link Utilization E TopN Average Sector Throughput E TopN Number of Connected SUs User Manual Device Specific Information 11 6 BreezeMAX Extreme 11 6 1 Overview E SW Compatibility version 1 5 E Collector type WiMAX Extreme BreezeMAX Extreme 11 6 2 Network Discovery Prerequisites Optional registered as Authorized manager with traps disabled according to BreezeMAX Extreme specifications 11 6 3 Key Performance Ind
44. User Manual Device Specific Information StarQuality Codes for Threshold Setting Table 11 19 4Motion BS Threshold Codes Continued Code Parameter DL MIMO CDD Ratio 4008 DL Retransmission Above Four Retransmissions 4DR6 DL Retransmission Four Retransmissions 4DR5 DL Retransmission One Retransmission 4DR2 DL Retransmission Three Retransmissions H4DRO DL Retransmission Two Retransmissions 4DR3 DL Retransmission Zero Retransmission HADR1 DL SINR Distribution SINR 130B till 17dB 4SD4 DL SINR Distribution SINR 17dB till 21dB 4SD5 DL SINR Distribution SINR 3dB till 9dB 4SD2 DL SINR Distribution SINR 9dB till 13dB 4SD3 DL SINR Distribution SINR gt 21dB 4SD6 DL SINR Distribution SINR Below 3dB 4SD1 Drop Ratio 4012 Dropped Bursts Qty 4027 Failed Ho Attempts 4030 Failed Ho Attempts Ratio 4016 Failed Initial NE 4NTn Failed Initial NE 4023 Failed Initial NE Ratio 4003 Gross Idle Entries 4031 Ho Attempts Ratio 4015 Idle MSs Qty 4020 Idle MSs Ratio 4032 MAP Length Eight Symbols 4MS4 MAP Length Four Symbols 4MS2 MAP Length More Than Ten Symbols 4MS6 MAP Length Six Symbols 4MS3 MAP Length Ten Symbols 4MS5 MAP Length Two Symbols 4MS1 MCS Distribution 16QAM 1 2 4D06 User Manual Device Specific Information StarQuality Codes for Threshold Setting Table 11 19 4Motion BS Threshold Codes
45. XLS file including entries which are not currently displayed Filter Filters entries by equipment name or measurement name The rules for special characters are the same as for search see Search Admin only on page 221 Entries with underline serve as links and jump to the specific Slot 2 Air Link Occupation equipment measurement with the properly selected date and time interval 8 3 2 Setting the Report Range and Display While viewing the report results the calendar at the Browser is used for setting the time interval of the report The selected report view is displayed to the right of the calendar You can also set what type of reports to view and whether to display the date in a column StarQuality Q User Manual Reports To use the calendar months or years OG 20003 Ise 2 O 1 2 Be s e 7 8 a 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Bn 22023203 2 27 28 29 3 31 Week Month Year 2008 fier zl O Months SS Feb Aug Mar Sep Apr Oct May Nov Jun Dec Day Week Conti Year Setting the Report Range and Display Time intervals starting in the future cannot be selected with the calendar 2008 zl fan TO WT wir lalale i 2 Em 5 6 7 8 9 Bil ie 13 14 15 16 Bae 12 EEE EEE d 27 B 29 3 Lat Day Month Year O 20003 fran GJ O Vear nna aa 2004 2010 2005 2011 2006 2012 2007 2013 2008 2014 2015 me Day Week Month Click on the arrow buttons in the two top corners of the calend
46. above 6 Click OK A new threshold template is added to the system StarQuality ol User Manual Setting Alarm Thresholds Assigning Threshold Templates to Equipments 6 3 Assigning Threshold Templates to Equipments gt To assign a threshold template to multiple equipments 1 From Settings select Threshold gt Configuration The threshold list is displayed 2 Click from template 3 Choose a threshold template from the drop down list The Threshold Configuration editor displays the attributes of the template nama Onipator Seege n Lxpresmon Vabe rAMA FOO r Lek eegen r lt SAM 1001 sample Levelt z Measurement ee EE hiver Sg I Tree Si tasik same traps f Command l Ceetinuous alert P Where Nsa stes or Csecsi Figure 6 3 Using Threshold Template 4 If required edit the values in the template 5 Click OK to view the list of relevant equipments for this threshold template All are checked by default and you can select the equipment s zen GC 3 tems found Expression FDO 20 20 182 201 Sot I r Urk Occupation Unik lt 70 0 dx n I sample E FIO 10 10 182 201 Sot 3 Ar Urk Occupation Downlink lt 0 0 Sum 3 sangi EL 2 Ar Urk Deeg lt 70 0 in 3 same we FZO 20 20 182 201 Sot 2 Ar Unk Occupation Downlink lt 0 0 du in 3 sample FO 30 30 18220 st Ar Unk Osoupaton Ee lt 70 0 xim 7 sangle we FZO 20 20 182 201 Sot 1 Ar Link Occupat
47. available when creating or editing threshold templates You can use the input fields in the Threshold Configuration window Figure 6 12 available in the following cases E Creating or editing a threshold that is not template based E Locally modifying a template based threshold see Editing a Template based Threshold Local Change on page 177 gt To generate a threshold expression 1 Access the Threshold Configuration window Settings gt Thresholds gt Configuration Type SUMP Trop Continuous alert StarQuality Threshold configuration Occupation damnknk lt 92 I FDBIDDES OUT lt B ss ie Input fields Baseine vokse average Z S Z dewation with Eee aa cycle F5 E sample based om the tast TE cyde Match in sample z Sample sine 3 FEO 9610 0 16 30 Set 3 Ar Urk Orrupoton Deech lt 50 0 tx in I sample add elem none 2 to F feses OO ox Cancel Figure 6 12 Threshold Configuration User Manual Setting Alarm Thresholds Generating the Expression Using Input Fields 2 Inthe Threshold Configuration page fill in or select the following fields as required The site and equipment of the measurement drop down fields are displayed only when opening the threshold editor from the main page If you edit the thresholds from the Equipment page you can choose the measurements belonging only to that specific one The measurement to be selected Oper
48. binary If the application detects an error during these checks then depending on the level of error it either immediately terminates or asks whether it should continue or not Always answer No and restart the installation e Telnet 10 10 187 126 hash 3 BOH INFO H INFO INFO INFO INFO INFO INFO INFO INFO INFO INFO INFO INFO INFO INFO INFO INFO INFO INFO StarQuality v2 Command line paramete Installer started LOG file tmp starquality install log Checking perl version Found perl usr bin perl Checking OS type OS Solaris_x86 Checking perl 32 64bit Checking perl PerllO Perl was built with PerllO Checking perl threading Perl threading disabled Checking required packages Package SUNWapchr found Package SUNWapchu found Package SUNWbash found Package SUNWggrp found Package SUNWgtar found Package SUNWgzip found Package SUNWlexpt found Package SUN hcu found Package hdr found Package hdu found Package hr found Package SUNWsshu found Done Checking required packages for the schematic map feature Package SUNWpng found Package SUNWzlib found Done Extracting files into the temp directory tmp starquality Done Licence information This prograi be found in By answerin 2 7 2 2 2 7 2 3 StarQuality m contains free of charge third party Java and Perl libraries The detailed list of components the detail t
49. edit 4 ss Running JOB localhost Administrator opt starquality Report reer e edit 5 alaian Running REPORT localhost Administrator fopt starquality 6 Data i GG edit 6 ane Running COMP localhost Administrator fopt starquality 03 00 s Data EP i edit 7 BEER Running MIGR localhost Administrator fopt starquality 01 00 edit 8 ss Running CHART localhost Administrator fopt starquality edit 9 Sredica Running SCHED localhost Administrator opt starquality edit del 10 a Running SNMP SNMP localhost Administrator opt starquality Y edit del 11 Oracle Running Oracle Orade localhost Administrator opt starquality Y edit del 12 EE Running Unix Linux Unix Linux localhost Administrator opt starquality Y WiMAX FDD WiMAX WIMAX Toer edit del 13 Collector Running FDD FDD localhost Administrator opt starquality Y WWiMAY TAM MAMAY WiMAY E Figure 9 18 Server Configuration Window The following information is displayed in the table E ID unique identifier of the server It is used when starting and halting the server from the command line or when displaying the summary of the collected data for the measurement servers E Name the name of the server E Status status of the server running not running or unknown Refer to Editing Server Configuration on page 252 HM Type the type of the server or the type of the server group for collector servers SOAP Manager Event E Server group
50. entire opt starquality directory lt Y N gt N Deleting the directory opt starquality Deleting any starquality files in the etc rc d directories Deleting any K starquality files in the etc rc d directories Deleting the file etc init d starquality Done Do you want to delete the user starg lt Y N gt N y Deleting the user starq Deleting the group starq Deleting the directory opt starquality Done Figure 2 72 Uninstalling StarQuality from Solaris User Manual N S B Getting Started Getting Started In this chapter StarQuality Login on page 108 The Structure of Interface Windows on page 110 The Menu System on page 111 Operations and Navigation in the Hierarchy on page 115 General Display Options on page 117 Editing Objects on page 119 User Manual Getting Started Login 3 1 Login 10 working clients may simultaneously use the system Using the system is possible with the following web browsers E Microsoft Internet Explorer E Mozilla Firefox gt To start a client session with StarQuality 1 Open a web browser and go to http lt ip or hostname gt 2 Enter User Name and Password The default admin users credentials are admin adminl23 The StarQuality opening window is displayed for a few moments and then the main interface window opens see Figure 3 2 If Flash Player is not installed on the machine from which the client is opened
51. for Windows StarQuality operation commands must always be executed from a cygwin window The Cygwin Installation files can be downloaded from the internet see To download and install Cygwin from the Internet on page 20 or Alvarion FTP Server see below gt To download and install Cygwin from the Alvarion FTP server 1 Download the CygwinFromWwwGoh4Com zip file from ftp downloads alvarion com StarSuite Star Quality Installations Username and password required when connecting as alvarioncustomer 2 Extract the zip file into a folder with a path that does not include spaces 3 From the extracted files run the setup exe file The Cygwin Net Release Setup Program window is displayed StarQuality nl User Manual Installation Pre installation Tasks Cygwin Setup Eat EN Cygwin Net Release Setup Program This setup program is used for the initial installation of the Cygwin environment as well as all subsequent updates Make sure to remember where you saved it The pages that follow will quide you through the installation Please note that Cygwin consists of a large number of packages spanning wide variety of purposes We only install a base set of packages by default You can always run this program at any time in the future to add remove or upgrade packages as necessary Cc Setup exe version 2 573 2 3 Copyright 2000 2007 http www cygwin com Figure 2 1 Cygwin Net Release Setup Program window
52. for a measurement server the name of its group E Host the host computer of the server E Login the user name used to login to the machine User Manual General Setting Options Server Configuration E Pwd user password If it is not set the application can still log in if SSH key based authentication is configured E Directory the directory of the StarQuality application The name of the directory should be an absolute path i e it should started with E Parami and Param2 Further parameters depending on the type of the server displayed with the appropriate name Measurement server Persistent SSH and SFTP connection Param1 Whether the SQLLDR and the MANAGER server can keep a persistent SSH and SFTP connection with the measurement server or not Persistent connection is strongly recommended since nonessential logins and logouts can be avoided There is only one case when non persistent connection is necessary in the case of certain former SSH implementations the established SFTP connection has fully utilized the CPU of the target machine even when no operation was executed How many seconds should the system wait for collector result if it is not running Param2 Application manager Cycle in sec The number of seconds waited between server monitoring Number of files During self testing the system checks the number of files in the tmp done directory that executes the data loading component If thi
53. for collection from the drop down menu or leave the value as non stop 8 Click OK the report variable is added to the list StarQuality User Manual Reports gt 8 2 1 2 StarQuality Regular Reports To edit an existing report variable 1 Click edit next to the variable to be changed the Report Variable Configuration window is displayed see Figure 8 2 2 Edit the variable name as required 3 Select if to activate the variable calculation using the Active check box 4 Click OK the report variable is updated in the list NOTE E An active report variable consumes computer resources Therefore it is recommended to define only the required variables and deactivate redundant ones I The only way to disable a variable is to set it as inactive You cannot delete a report variable Defining Report Views Report view is the display method of the report variables Report views have three types Table TopN and Chart not applicable The first two are table arranged report variables The difference between TopN and Table reports is that for TopN reports it is impossible to navigate among the sites To Start Report View Configuration 1 From the Settings menu select Reports gt Report Views The Report View Configuration starting page contains a table showing the active report views On a new system this table contains the predefined reports User Manual Reports Regular Reports 01 Report
54. for filtering the measurements by their types 3 3 2 Alarms E Items in the submenu panel Root root directory navigation startpoint If defined public and private menu items for viewing the alarms under the chosen menu item StarQuality D User Manual Getting Started Reports E Items in the Browser Time Span Selecting the time range to display alarms see Viewing Alarms by Time Span on page 186 from time date to time date day week month year real time view auto refresh view View menu group Choosing the display mode for the alarms see Alarm View Options on page 186 Filters menu group Filtering of the alarms to be displayed see Filtering Alarms on page 190 3 3 3 Reports E Items in the submenu panel On demand report setting a new report see On Demand Reports on page 202 Bulk export wizard exporting reports to Excel see Bulk Export Wizard Exporting Data to XLS Files on page 210 Direct links to the built in reports see Built in Reports on page 195 E Items in the Browser Calendar The reports are displayed with respect to the time interval selected in the calendar Settings appear only when displaying reports include Type Show date column Refer to Setting the Report Range and Display on page 207 StarQuality User Manual Getting Started 3 3 4 StarQuality Settings Setti
55. from Oracle to StarQuality Sending requests to 16162 SNMP AlvariSTAR in order to reach KPI 2 4 1 3 Installing Oracle Follow these guidelines E Consult Table 2 1 for the correct Oracle Server Client versions E Install Oracle Server on a standalone Oracle machine according to instructions issued by Oracle corporation Make sure that the database is set to a minimum of 170 processes E Install Oracle client using the Administrator type installation E When completing the Oracle client installation use the Oracle Net Configuration Assistant to create a connection to the Database server and test it E During StarQuality installation the Oracle server must be running and the database connection from the StarQuality machine should be available StarQuality O User Manual Installation 2 4 1 4 StarQuality Pre installation Tasks E To test connectivity to the database server from the StarQuality machine use the sqlplus utility as follows Assuming that the database SID is testme and system password is oracle switch to the command prompt on Windows or use a console on Solaris logged in as the Oracle user and enter the following command sqlplus system oracle testme Enter exit or quit to complete the procedure The following Oracle database information should be available when installing the StarQuality Oracle Database server IP Service name SID TNS Password for SYSTEM use Inst
56. is performed Active but non discoverable the measurements are actively made by the StarQuality application through the available API but it is impossible to discover and monitor the measurements of the equipment This is typical when parameters need to be set for the measuring system in order to start the measurements e g one or more WEB server addresses should be given to measure HTTP services Passive and optionally capable of auto discovery the StarQuality only collects files containing measurement values in certain defined formats and optionally records and deletes the pieces of equipment and measurements based on the collected data The Servers menu includes five submenus described herein Licences Overview The licence for StarQuality is an encrypted file which defines E Validity period either unlimited or temporary E Number of collector Network Elements NEs of any type BTSs only disregarding the number of AUs under each BTS No of SUs is unlimited except for FDD 3 5 3 6 10 SUs per BTS The installation CD includes a temporary licence file for a limited period of time and limited number of NEs To receive acquire the permanent licence access the Alvarion on line feature licence application refer to Getting Feature Licenses Guide Managing Licences The Licences submenu is available only for admin users You can edit the license table and compare the number of available and required licences I
57. jax ag Tine spare ROOT Operation E Link DS Lo Mrs oono f e TE From To Duration Threshold name Level Event Type Ack user Ack time view xis ae Teaze Ss 29 99 SATA BS E Filters Name Level Every one Type Every one Group alarms Every one Acknowledged OK Figure 7 2 Table View of Alarms StarQuality User Manual Threshold Crossing Alarms Monitoring gt Overview To use the Alarms list Use the following operations in the alarms list Table 7 1 Using the Alarms List To Do this Comments Move to next page entries on the list Use the arrows lt gt at the top of the list Sort the list by column entries Click on the column header Sort in ascending descending order Click the up down arrows The numbers indicate the order under the column header Download the table Click the view xls link Obtain detailed information of an entry Click the view link the corresponding measurement values are displayed in a chart Acknowledge an alarm Click the ack link if the alarm has already been acknowledged the time and name of the user that acknowledged are displayed in the table Delete close an alarm Click the ack link if available If the alarm is not a threshold violation but is from an event definition and the event has not yet been closed a del link appears
58. machine managed network equipment and other NMS OSS elements User Manual Installation Pre installation Tasks Table 2 15 Network Ports Use Port Protocol Direction App server and managed 161 SNMP Outbound towards NE equipment App server managed 162 SNMP Outbound towards NMS OSS equipment and other elements NMS OSS elements App server and managed 69 TFTP From Managed equipment to equipment StarQuality App server and client 8080 Inbound Outbound between client and server Oracle communication client As installed From StarQuality to Oracle server Default 1521 and from Oracle to StarQuality Sending requests to 16162 SNMP AlvariSTAR in order to reach KPI 2 7 1 3 Installing Oracle Follow these guidelines M Consult Table 2 1 for the correct Oracle Server Client versions E Install Oracle Server on a standalone Oracle machine according to instructions issued by Oracle corporation Make sure that the database is set to a minimum of 170 processes E Install Oracle client using the Administrator type installation E When completing the Oracle client installation use the Oracle Net Configuration Assistant to create a connection to the Database server and test it E During StarQuality installation the Oracle server must be running and the database connection from the StarQuality machine should be available StarQuality User Manual Installation K Se Ch
59. of the measurement Right click and set a trendline calculation for any element ROOT gt Big setups gt 10 10 141 150 gt BS 0 0 2 13 13 13 Measurements Operation sl 10 10 141 150 BS 0 0 2 13 13 13 Air Link Utilization Export to XLS aj show details E 5 50 N 5 30 Bi 10 2010 05 29 02 20 2010 05 29 11 40 10 05 30 06 20 2010 05 30 15 40 lt All UL Air Link Utilization Data Zone DL Air Link Utilization Data Zone DL Air Link Utilization First Zone zl Figure 5 8 Display with Flash Options E Peak Default Yes No E Resolution Medium Small Large E Minimum Maximum values Click OK to activate your settings User Manual Viewing Measurements Elements 5 5 4 Elements The Elements group contains the measurements listed for the selected equipment To display one chart per an individual measurements click on the specific measurement Note that the elements in the main part of the display and in the Elements group of the Browser pane are not necessarily corresponding that is the StarQuality draws automatically only the fewest charts possible StarQuality 157 User Manual Viewing Measurements Searching Measurements 5 6 5 6 1 StarQuality Searching Measurements On Searching in General Search strings are entered frequently in the StarQuality application in order to search by text or to filter the results There are two types of searching methods th
60. on Template based Threshold Modification 3 Click OK the Template Configuration window is displayed 4 Modify the required threshold attributes You can use the input fields as described in Generating the Expression Using Input Fields on page 179 5 Click OK to save your modification to the threshold ol User Manual Setting Alarm Thresholds Creating a Threshold Not Based on Template 6 5 Creating a Threshold Not Based on Template gt To create a non template based threshold 1 From Settings select Site and Equipment Configuration 2 Navigate to the equipment for which you want to create a local threshold and scroll down to the Threshold section 3 Click add new the threshold configuration parameters are displayed mme E vane Ep ge re PN E s rgte based av bat TE orde 8 ke add chee evt ype tast S ar ien Command Cart musen siest r when rey a a ees Genet 100 v Figure 6 11 Adding a New Threshold 4 Fill in the required threshold attributes You can use the input fields as described in Generating the Expression Using Input Fields on page 179 5 Click OK to save your modification to the threshold StarQuality User Manual Setting Alarm Thresholds Generating the Expression Using Input Fields 6 6 Generating the Expression Using Input Fields This section provides basic rules for creating threshold expressions using input fields Input files are not
61. or saved on the client machine at any location gt To export AU or common BTS data 1 From Reports select Bulk Export Wizard The Bulk Export Wizard window is displayed Bei Bulk export wizard Basic parameters gt BTS selection Selection Report name 4Motion Center 1 Path Report remark free text From YYYY MM DD HH24 MESS 2008 Hos H20 00 jo0 k00 To YYYV MM DD HH24 MESS 2003 os H21 00 00 00 NE type fers Technology 4Motion M Figure 8 16 Bulk Export Wizard Window 2 Specify meaningful name and description free text to the report StarQuality User Manual Reports StarQuality Bulk Export Wizard Exporting Data to XLS Files 3 Select a time frame using the input fields or the calendar button Specify maximum one week Longer type results in an error message when trying to proceed to the next stage NOTE Seconds are ignored minutes are regarded as the closest quarter of an hour 4 Select NE Type BTS and any technology required 5 Click BTS Selection in the path at the top of the work area see Figure 8 16 the filtering criteria screen is displayed Bulk export wizard a Basic parameters gt BTS selection Site name 4Motion BTS name IT BTS address 10 10 Site ID OK B 11190 IT Site name BTS name E e BTS address Site ID L 4Motion 10 10 184 4
62. own settings edit del Corinne Corinne No Yes edit del mm mm No Yes Figure 9 29 Users List 2 Select either add new or edit to modify a user select delete to delete a user from the list the following user definition fields are displayed I Browser User 4 E 01 User admin 225 i 02 User rights User administration 03 Password COO Login Pwd Again Admin C Yes Restricted No Can modify his her own settings Iv OK Cancel Figure 9 30 User Administration StarQuality Gei User Manual General Setting Options User Permissions Rights CR fe 9 8 2 1 StarQuality 3 Specify the following parameters for the added or modified user Name The name of the user e g First name Family name Login The user will be able to login with this name It is suggested to use the small case letters of the English alphabet The given value must be unique Password An initial password If you do not specify a new password then only the name and the admin fields are modified Admin This option is only available if you are logged in with the admin user The options are Table 9 1 Admin Registering Options Option Description Yes Provide the registered user with administrator rights Restricted Provide the registered user with restricted administrator rights No Provide the registered user with normal or restricted rights based on the value of the n
63. path 10 Click Save to save the report settings optional the following window is displayed Specify the report name and choose if to include the search settings Seve the Search ehd as we Day Week Month Year Figure 8 13 On demand Reports Save options StarQuality User Manual On Demand Reports Reports Click Show to display the report in a regular report format including the 11 option to specify time frame and export to xls format begoen essrenent sae name best Bsp ink Martian 5 Heute sot 3 Pe e am SAATI MAS E sm Figure 8 14 On demand Reports Show StarQuality User Manual Reports Viewing Reports 8 3 Viewing Reports The reports are displayed in the Reports viewing menu about an hour after defining the variables 8 3 1 Navigating Report Views Use the following buttons Table 8 1 Navigating Reports Button Link Description oo Go to the first and previous page respectively Go to the next and last page respectively ov Page x out of total number of pages Jump directly to the required EE page by entering its number in the text field and pressing the enter key Up and down arrows for ordering all results on the given level The S current ordering is indicated by a blue rectangle around the selected arrow Export current table to Exports the currently displayed entries to an XLS file XLS Export all data to XLS Exports the all the entries to an
64. possible chart elements behind the element should be visible Its use is recommended if the type of the element is area or bar and the value of the zero point parameters is not previous value but previous zero Assume zero when value is missing If there is no measurement value at a given time the application can draw the chart according to the last value or assume the missing value to be zero To create a new element Select the type of the measurement or the report variable The following configurable elements appear from the list mentioned above name object and threshold if a measurement is selected currently see below field type chart base color peak color and zero value Edit the elements as required Note that the order does not appear since the new element receives the last sequence number automatically Depending on the object maximum three pull down menus are displayed Incase of site level report variable site pull down menu In case of equipment level report variable site and equipment pull down menus In case of measurement element site equipment and measurement pull down menus The equipment pull down menu always displays the list of equipment directly under the currently chosen element in the site menu while the measurement menu always shows the measurements under the currently selected equipment When the selection of the pull down menus is changed the page reloads automatic
65. see Figure 3 3 3 3 1 Measurements Main keen ae menu Ss Tabs E View ROOT Display deleted E Elements Items in Sane a Browser Mere P StarQuality E Items in the submenu panel Regular Setups Root root directory navigation startpoint under the chosen menu item Sub menus Figure 3 3 Example of Menus Submenu Panel and Browser in Measurements Search for sites equipments measurements and charts on the basis of sites equipment names see Searching Measurements on page 158 If defined public and private menu items for viewing the measurements User Manual Getting Started Alarms E Items in the Browser View menu group Selecting the mode of display for the measurements see Measurements Display Options on page 151 Time Span Selecting the time range to display measurements from time date to time date day week month year real time view auto refresh view Chart Settings displaying the measurement values Elements menu group This menu contains a list of the sites equipments and measurement types The root of the hierarchy is determined by the originally selected menu item see Viewing Measurement Data on page 155 Element name e g lt FDD Network gt If the list contains too many elements they are grouped by the system using links pointing to the sub lists Measurement Types
66. selected hierarchy item E Logical BS History for 4Motion only Displays the BSs to which the a CPE SU has been connected during mobility within the measured time see Figure 5 7 ROOT H Bei 2001 gt 4Motion regular setups gt roee SUs gt BS 1 2 3 gt SU 00 10 E7 0A 77 65 Operation Z Link Logical BS history SUMAC From Site ID From BS ID ToSiteID ToBSID Date SU 00 10 E7 0A 77 65 ae Sa 5454 BS 1 2 3 2009 08 13 01 52 49 SU 00 10 7 08 77 65 BEES ge ii EE AEE E SU 00 10 E7 04 77 65 5454 BS 1 2 3 2009 08 13 21 52 51 Back Figure 5 7 Logical BS History Window E Go to Configuration jumps to the Settings gt Site and System Configuration page E Save as submenu adds a submenu item at the top panel see Saving Items as A Submenu on page 161 User Manual Viewing Measurements Viewing Measurement Data a ZEN e Ee Der StarQuality Viewing Measurement Data After reaching the equipment level using one of the navigation methods described above the measurement results can be reviewed in chart format by selecting the concrete equipment You can export the measurement data to Excel by clicking the Export to XLS link at the top right corner of each chart Setting Time Span You can define the time span of measurements to be displayed The following view options are available Table 5 1 Time Span Options Icon Tooltip Description Realtime view
67. servers cannot be extended or limited Measurement servers arbitrary number of these can exist and each must belong to a measurement server group There are three types of measurement servers matching the types given for the measurement server groups Active and discoverable the measurements are actively made by the StarQuality application through the available API The measurements supported by discoverable equipment can be discovered or queried through a suitable management protocol e g the list of interfaces on network equipment or the list of disk partitions on a UNIX server These are discovered and automatically monitored by the StarQuality e g it automatically deletes them if the measurement has ended or the measurement name has changed Even though the StarQuality automatically searches the measurements in such a case they can also be manually recorded If such a measurement is created subsequent User Manual General Setting Options Licences 9 60 2 9 6 2 1 9 6 2 2 StarQuality automatic discovery will not occur Accordingly if the measured object is deleted from the active equipment it will not disappear from the StarQuality This type of measurement will again be monitored automatically only if a new manual discovery is performed on the equipment through the web interface and it is saved afterwards For certain discoverable servers there are measurement types e g servers measuring IPSec where no discovery
68. the Same d E TE 30 2 3 1 Pre installation TASKS 0 0 00 cccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeeeereeeneeeneeeneeeneeeneees 30 232 Installing ag All tieren EENEG 38 2 4 Installing StarQuality on Windows Server with Oracle Database on a Separate Machine vaskes cn vctncadstwnccnes tntnicnecnannansncensasanieasddemstattncanaasasaaeatensaasanes 46 2 4 1 Pre installation E 46 24 2 Installing Star Quality sc iicccieccsas Ed a a a E EREE 54 2 5 Installing StarQuality on Solaris Server with Internal Oracle Database 62 StarQuality Q User Manual Contents 2 5 1 Pre installation Tasks 00 0 0 cccccececeeceecceeecesecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeaneeaeeseeeeeeereeeneeeneeeneneneees 62 252 Jee eege 64 2 6 Installing StarQuality on Solaris Server with External Oracle Database on the Same EI UNE 71 2 6 1 Pre installation Tasks ccc ccececeeceeeceeeceseceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeeeeeeeereeeneeeneeenseneees 71 262 Installing SAA er 74 2 7 Installing StarQuality on Solaris Server with Oracle Database on a Separate LE TE DR NN 81 271 Pre installation TASKS vevsakemesaamnemsm gun nineheneeanbenne 81 2 7 2 Installing ee E e acereaxeinamntiamcrematizecceangsstenees 83 2 8 Running StarQuality aca ask ca eege 90 2 8 1 Running StarQuality on Wimdows 90 2 8 2 Running StarQuality on EE 92 2 8 3 Loading a StarQuality LICend Luuumumammmumnnu hu vn 93 2 9 Additional Installation Information sss evernnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnn
69. the item appears in the Measurements Alarms menu D User Manual Viewing Measurements Setting Trendlines to Graphs 5 8 Setting Trendlines to Graphs When working in Flash mode StarQuality enables defining trendlines for displayed measurements You can also define thresholds using the trendline values gt To set trendlines 1 When viewing a result table in Flash mode right click on the table itself and select Set trendline The Set Trendline page is displayed The parameters in this page may vary depending on the equipment type and measurements ROOT gt Regular Setups gt 10 10 144 233 gt Common measurements Operation sl 10 10 144 233 ASN GW MS Registration Export to XLS Si Set trendline Authentication oK Rejections Created Service Flows Cancel Qty Failed Initial NE Max Registered MSs Min Registered MSs E r Polynomial x 2 Registered MSs Qty Polynomial x 3 PRI Polynomial x 4 Succeed Initial NE Polynomial x 5 Polynomial x 6 Limit indicator Limit sum E Average and one deviation Average and two deviation Average and three deviation Figure 5 11 Setting Trendlines Window StarQuality User Manual Viewing Measurements Setting Trendlines to Graphs 2 For every entry select one of the following trendline types from the drop down list Linear Polynomial x 2 to x6 Difference The difference between the current value and the previous value are sh
70. the page for a given piece of equipment will be displayed immediately if the user has the rights for a single piece of equipment only furthermore the elements of a site will also be displayed if only a single site could be accessed Starting page Choose the value from the scroll down list Empty the initial page is displayed for the user after login Menu items the page below the given menu item is displayed for the user after login its value can be one of the menu items below Alarms and Measurements Measurement page info The amount of equipment information displayed on the page containing the measurements Chart order on actual result page Whether the public and or private charts should be displayed on the base measurement page accessed through the Current measurements menu item Moreover if they are displayed then in what order this setting does not influence the display of virtual equipment there only created charts are displayed in the order they were configured User Manual General Setting Options Customizing Public Admin only and Private Menu Items 9 4 2 E Equipment actual results chart time span On the equipment measurement page the chart resolution cannot be specified instead the user can set the value here By default this is the suggested 5 minute resolution daily chart The smallest chart on the page displaying the details of individual measurements is set based on the time interval of the measurement
71. the system without modification see below Ifthe chart template configuration is opened from the equipment page it is possible to use all chart templates at the same time which means that you can create all charts for the equipment templates in one step Chart configuration OG 10 00 add new copy from Name Created by Unit Minimum Maximum Summary Short help URL from template OK Figure 9 13 Chart Configuration accessed from the Equipment page To modify chart elements 1 Edit the information in the charts page as required The page contains the list of private or public charts together with the following attributes E Editing links add new creates a new chart copy from creates a chart based on an existing one Both in the private and the public charts you can choose from the list of your private charts and the public charts that you have access to from template creates a new chart based on a template see Viewing Charts on page 243 from each templates creating new charts from templates appears only if the chart creation is initiated from the equipment page This list allows connecting of each chart to an existing template edit edits the chart attributes that are displayed here del deletes chart members edits the members of the chart User Manual General Setting Options Configuring Public and Private Charts StarQuality Name The name of t
72. the threshold violation or the report variable to be displayed Field Which measured value belonging to the object and optionally to the report variable should be displayed by the chart element For measurement chart elements this can be an uplink or downlink For report charts this can be minimum maximum average etc Type The representation of a chart element should be a line an area or a bar Chart base Selects the chart base of the chart element With the exception of the first element where naturally the O value necessarily corresponds to the zero it is possible to choose whether the chart base of the chart element should agree with the current chart base of the previous chart element chart elements drawn onto each other or with the current value of the previous chart element chart elements drawn over each other The following example shows the two different diagrams for the same value pair Color Element color User Manual General Setting Options Configuring Public and Private Charts StarQuality E Peak color If the chart resolution e g 15 minutes 2 hours etc is smaller than the value resolution e g 15 minutes 3 minutes etc the application shows the calculated average on the chart both on the chart defined here and on the default one If a color is set here the average values are displayed in addition to the maximum values of the data Transparent Determines whether the other
73. with their default values Click OK Discovery is running and can take up a few minutes The following window is displayed Red fields mean that collection is not activated by default D User Manual Network Discovery Discovery of Equipment under a Server Health Site Name OR2 Connection xe User system Password SYSTEM password Right SYSDBA Server group No server group definied server ENN Previous server iene i Collect data Yes Keep collected 365 data for days ee Smin Created by admin Created when 2009 03 01 11 44 47 Last modified by admin Last modified at 2009 03 01 11 44 47 Measurement type Index Name Interval Active session 28 ANONYMOUS Active session 15 min All ceecinn IR ANANYMNI IS All ceecinn 15 min Figure 4 9 Network Discovery Results Oracle 9 To start collecting select from the Operations drop down menu Modify Equipment The following window is displayed StarQuality User Manual Network Discovery Parent site Name Description Connection User Password Right Keep collected data for days Timeout sec Retries Default measurement interval Choose an icon SERVER HEALTH sl Discovery of Equipment under a Server Health Site OR2 xe system SYSTEM password SYSDBA 7 365 fis min sl Jicon_equip png sl parameters Switched Max r F
74. 03 HARQ Packet Error Rate PER QPSK 1 2 Rep 4 4E02 HARQ Packet Error Rate PER QPSK 1 2 Rep 6 4E01 HARQ Packet Error Rate PER QPSK 3 4 4E05 HARQ Packet Error Rate Percent 4E00 MAP Length Eight Symbols 4MS4 User Manual Device Specific Information StarQuality Table 11 13 Syntax for 4Motion BS Measurements Continued Codes for Threshold Setting Description Parameter MAP Length Four Symbols 4MS2 MAP Length More Than Ten Symbols 4MS6 MAP Length Six Symbols 4MS3 MAP Length Ten Symbols 4MS5 MAP Length Two Symbols 4MS1 MCS Distribution 16QAM 1 2 4D06 MCS Distribution 16QAM 3 4 4D07 MCS Distribution 64QAM 1 2 4D08 MCS Distribution 64QAM 2 3 4D09 MCS Distribution 64QAM 3 4 4D10 MCS Distribution 64QAM 5 6 4D11 MCS Distribution QPSK 1 2 4D04 MCS Distribution QPSK 1 2 Rep 2 4D03 MCS Distribution QPSK 1 2 Rep 4 4D02 MCS Distribution QPSK 1 2 Rep 6 4D01 MCS Distribution QPSK 3 4 4D05 Max Spectral Efficiency all MSs 4SEM Number Of Connected SUs 4CS Slot Utilization ALL 4UA UL Noise 99th Percentile 4UN1 UL Noise Median 4UN2 UL SINR Distribution 17dB lt SINR lt 21dB 4SU4 UL SINR Distribution 5dB lt SINR lt 9dB 4SU2 UL SINR Distribution 9dB lt SINR lt 13dB 4SU3 UL SINR Distribution SINR lt 5dB 4SU1 UL SINR Distribution SINR gt 21dB SU6 UL Slot Utilization Data Zone 4UU1 UL Slot Utilization Feedback Zone 4UU2 Use
75. 10 10 184 43 BS 9 9 9 01 00 00 110 10 184 43 BS 9 9 9 10 10 184 43 BS 9 9 9 5 4 ENE E E E E E PENE 10 10 184 43 B5993 54 0 0 10 10 184 43 B599 9 54 0 0 10 10 184 43 B599 9 54 0 0 10 10 184 43 B599 9 54 0 0 10 10 184 43 BS999 54 0 0 10 10 184 43 B5999 54 0 0 10 10 184 43 BS 9 9 9 54 0 0 10 10 184 43 0 0 10 10 184 43 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 b s 0 0 b s 0 0 0 0 2009 06 20 06 15 10 184 0 0 2009 06 20 06 30 00 __ 10 10 184 43 55999 54 aao neeo on 0 0 ANNAN ACE AM ME AE MM 4M 4M 404 49 pennn ZE am Oo 14741 NM mim Figure 8 21 Sample xls File StarQuality User Manual Reports Bulk Export Wizard Exporting Data to XLS Files gt To export SU data 1 From Reports select Bulk Export Wizard The Bulk Export Wizard window is displayed see Figure 8 16 2 Specify meaningful name and description free text 3 Select a time frame using the input fields or the calendar button Specify maximum one week Longer type results in an error message when trying to proceed to the next stage NOTE Ed Seconds are ignored minutes are regarded as the closest quarter of an hour 4 Select NE Type SU and any technology required 5 Click BTS Selection in the path at the top of the work area see Figure 8 16 the filtering criteria screen is displayed see Figure 8 17 6 Enter the following crit
76. 3 10 10 184 43 2500 Figure 8 17 Bulk Export Wizard Filtering Devices 6 Enter the following criteria All categories are optional That is if left empty no filtering is performed Also all input is according to the search rules described in On Searching in General on page 158 E Site name E BTS name E BTS Address IP E Site ID as exists in the database 7 Click OK a list of network elements matching the filter criteria is displayed You can repeat the filtering until getting the desired results Q User Manual Reports Bulk Export Wizard Exporting Data to XLS Files 8 Select the check boxes of BTSs you wish to export data from or use the topmost check box to select all the elements NOTE The Select All check box refers only to the currently displayed page For selecting all the results in x all pages select the checkbox separately on each page 9 Click Type Selection in the selection path Figure 8 16 the Exported Entity choice window is displayed E For AU BS data select Logical BS measurements default E For common BTS data select Common measurements gt Browser Bulk export wizard Basic parameters gt BTS selection gt Type selection gt Export Logical BS measurements Measurement types Common measurements Figure 8 18 Exported Entity Selection 10 Click Export in the selection path Figure 8 16 The following message is displayed Windows Inte
77. 4 Install DI Admin A Install Audio 4 Install E Base amp Install E Database 4 Install Devel 4 Install E Doc 4 Install Editors amp Install Gnome 4 Install JV Hide obsolete packages lt Back Cancel Figure 2 47 Select Packages Window All Install StarQuality Q User Manual Installation Pre installation Tasks 9 Verify that all the entries under the All main package have also been changed to Install see Figure 2 7 10 Scroll down to the Perl package and expand it using the sign 11 Check the sub package under Perl If it is other than 5 8 x x e g skip click on it to change it to the required 5 8 x x see Figure 2 8 NOTE Ed The Perl version must be 5 8 x x otherwise it does not meet the StarQuality requirements In this case use a different cygwin installation package Cygwin Setup Select Packages oj E Select Packages Select packages to install C Keep C Prev Cun C Exp View Category Caso New ee See Paa O J Editors 4 Install Gnome 4 Install Interpreters 4 Install Libs 43 Install Math Ar Install Net 4 Install Perl EI Perl amp Install Version 43 5 8 8 4 nja 9 972k perl Python 4 Install of 4 gt JV Hide obsolete packages pen Figure 2 48 Select Packages Window Perl Version 12 Click Next the installation proceeds until completed StarQuality 6 User Manual Installation Pre installation Tasks 47 Cyg
78. 5 libgdbm4 libintl8 libpoptO login minires perl version 5 8 x x tar texinfo w32api This Installation type is applicable when installing StarQuality on Windows server with external Oracle database on the same machine refer to Table 2 1 The installation has to be performed by a local administrator user During the installation the installer writes information into two destinations the Details view and the log file To display the Details view click Show Details in the installation wizard The log file is located in the Temp directory of the user by default C Documents and Settings lt USER gt Local Settings Temp User Manual Installation Installing StarQuality 2 3 2 2 StarQuality Installation Procedure 1 Ensure that the pre installation task are complete as required in Section 2 3 1 2 Do one of the following Insert the installation DVD into the DVD drive or Copy unzip the Installation folder directly onto one of the disk drives for example C IMPORTANT Do not place the installation files into a long path This is an Oracle installer limitation 3 Run the installation program starquality exe The installation wizard is displayed 8 StarQuality Setup Bisi E Welcome to the StarQuality Setup Wizard This wizard will guide you through the installation of StarQuality It is recommended that you close all other applications before starting Setup This will make it possible to update r
79. 5 Click OK The site is created under the ROOT 6 Proceed with discovery of devices according to the site type you created refer to Discovery of Equipment under a Server Health Site on page 130 StarQuality User Manual Network Discovery Discovery of WiMAX Devices 4 2 Discovery of WiMAX Devices This section describes how to add BTSs to the network Data collection is automatically activated after discovery except for equipments collected by SNMP for which data collection has to be activated manually gt To perform actual discovery 1 From Settings select Site and Equipment Configuration 2 Enter the site matching the equipment type to be discovered by clicking its icon 3 From the Creation drop down menu select Add Equipments plural from Template 4 Select the template upon which to base the equipment setup For FDD ver3 5 3 6 WiMAX FDD SNMP For FDD ver3 7 WiMAX FDD TFTP For TDD TDD For 4Motion WiMAX 4Motion For VL WiMAX VL For Extreme WiMAX Extreme A basic setup template page is displayed NOTE x Each discovery can include a single equipment type StarQuality User Manual Network Discovery Discovery of WiMAX Devices Template name WiMAX FDD Q Equipment Creation Job Job creation and run Discover equipments f yes Input file No Equipment name prefix Equipment name postfix IP address range mask 24 Y Community public
80. 5Q CONF dbf Size 300M Data tablespace SO DATA File C JORACLEIPRODUCT10 2 0JORADATAJORCLISQ DATA dbF Size 10000M Nullsoft Install System v2 37 Figure 2 39 Oracle Connection Tablespace Parameters 12 Click Next Oracle user parameters window is displayed M starquality Setup Bisi E 3 User name 5Q User password oe Confirm password ee Oracle connection Please fill in the Oracle user parameters Nullsoft Install System v2 37 Back Cancel Figure 2 40 Oracle Connection User Parameters 13 Click Next The installer displays the Setup wizard and completes the installation StarQuality Q User Manual Installation StarQuality Installing StarQuality StarQuality Setup fala Completing the StarQuality Setup Wizard StarQuality has been installed on your computer Click Finish to close this wizard Gancel Figure 2 41 StarQuality Setup Wizard Completing Installation 14 Click Finish to close the wizard 15 To load a licence and run StarQuality refer to Loading a StarQuality Licence on page 93 Running StarQuality on Windows on page 90 User Manual Installation 2 4 2 4 1 2 4 1 1 2 4 1 2 StarQuality Installing StarQuality on Windows Server with Oracle Database on a Separate Machine Installing StarQuality on Windows Server with Oracle Database on a Separate Machine Before beginning the StarQu
81. 75 EEE EEE EE EE EE 275 StarQuality User Manual Contents 11 2 2 Network Discovery Prerequisites cccscecccceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeesesseeneneeneeeneees 275 11 2 3 Key Performance Indicators KP geiestgeguEesk Eu EEN SEENEN ege 276 11 2 4 Codes for Threshold Geting nk 278 11 2 5 Default Built in GROG arsen dd 279 11 3 Bre zeACCESS VL iiiaio esiisa raa a AE a aaaea a inaia a a idre adian aaaea daiat RaiS 280 Sei 280 11 3 2 Network Discovery Prerequisites cceccecccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseeeeneeeeeeeeees 280 11 3 3 Key Performance Indicators KPIS cicicscisccsiissscetceatteestaveasineesieeesantianatenendennians 280 11 3 4 Codes for Threshold Geting ek 284 11 35 Default Built in ROPOMS wisiicccecxteasscteriedenaachiewlicsnstonteneeianuieebreetemuasnenmnendia 286 11 4 4Motion Ver 25 4usseennmaeamseunaemninmmemjv vrake kake 287 NES ESTE EEE EE 287 11 4 2 Network Discovery Prerequisites csccceeccce cree eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenesseeeeeeeeeeeneees 287 11 4 3 Key Performance Indicators KPIs mv mvvmnrasssvmsmeranmkmrve minkende 287 11 4 4 Codes for Threshold Geting nk 290 11 4 5 Default Built in E ET 292 RRE Le D DT 293 ER ETE EE 293 11 5 2 Network Discovery Prerequisi s numnsuuuu uvenn 293 11 5 3 Key Performance Indicators KPIS EEN 293 11 5 4 Codes for Lesben ege Ziedel tani 301 11 5 5 Default Built in RG POMS sic ccsie cds asiesatetnesiendstondadctpstacsnvtadehieethdrectetaalnentiveder
82. 8 Figure 6 2 Threshold Template Configuration New 169 Figure 6 3 Using Threshold TETPl le massemedia 172 Figure 6 4 Relevant EqupmenSuvaramnuasamnnsgmsaunieneue hinne dE 172 Figure 6 5 Threshold Template Details Linaraanaastguretesnmebinsuniembiuia ip 173 Figure 6 6 Items to Assign The Threshold eet uuesbtsgesguuuKkESeSE CAE ESKESESENENSEEEeEEEEREEAE ENEE 174 Figure 6 7 Threshold Template Configuration Template List 175 Figure 6 8 Threshold Template Configuration Editing AEN 176 Figure 6 9 Message on Template based Threshold Modification rrvrrrrrnnronornnnrrrrnnnnnnrnnn 176 StarQuality User Manual Figures Figure 6 10 Message on Template based Threshold Modification srnnrrrrnnrrrnonnnrrrrnnnnnnnnn 177 Figure 6 11 Adding a New Threshold 22 cccceceeeeseeecceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeneeeenssenaaeeneeesenensenseneaes 178 Figure 6 12 Threshold e ie E EE 179 Figure 7 1 Alarms Summary at the Top Right Corner of the Window eernnvnnnrrvrrrnnnnonvrnnnnn 184 Figure 7 2 Table View of AlarmS scacsitisacateevs atinastecentsaadiedsncadvatarsedsesdanvedunaneranniateuestentixe 184 Figure 7 3 Detailed Alarm Information ecccccssccececceeeseeeeseeeeesseeeeeeneeeseneesneneesnneeenseneeeees 185 Figure 7 4 Icon View of AlarmS Lassen 188 ele 188 Figure 7 6 Detailed View of Alarms erussssvvonensvnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnenennnnnensennnnnnnnnnanennnnnnnnnenennnnenene 189 Figure 7 7 The Equipment
83. 8 2 Report Configuration The configuration of reports Settings gt Reports is available to admin users only 8 2 1 Regular Reports Report creation consists of the following steps E Defining the variables which will be the building blocks of the reports Only measurements performed after defining them as variables will be available for the reports Refer to Section 8 2 1 1 E Sorting the created variables in various combinations into report views Refer to Section 8 2 1 2 8 2 1 1 Defining Report Variables Reports are based on the system existing measurements gt To start defining report variables 1 From the Settings menu select Reports gt Report Variables The Report Variable Configuration starting page contains a table showing the active currently monitored and inactive report variables In a new system the table contains the variables used for the predefined reports 01 Report variables ET Report variable configuration 03 Scheduled reports Detailed add new Variable name Measurement name Additional query summary at Interval When Active equipment level edit Motion Air Link Utilization ALL Air Link Utilization ALL Yes 300 kratt Yes Motion Average Sector Non edit Througheut Average Sector Throughput Yes 900 Bi Yes Motion DL Air Link Utilization Data DL Air Link Utilization Data Non edit ne Yes 900 sin Yes edit Motion DL Air Link Utilization Map DL Air Link Utilization
84. B GUI from Settings select Servers gt Start Stop Status click start all Wait for the list to refresh o User Manual Installation Loading a StarQuality Licence 7 Inthe WEB GUI from Settings select Servers gt Start Stop Status click Check all wait for all the entries to refresh and verify that all the entries are green gt To stop the server 1 While logged in as root user enter the command usr apache bin apachectl stop Actual path may vary according to the Apache configuration See Apache Configuration on page 67 2 Do one of the following E Return to the StarQuality server machine console and enter the command etc init d starquality stop E In the WEB GUI from Settings select Servers gt Start Stop Status click stop all Wait for the list to refresh 3 In the WEB GUI from Settings select Servers gt Start Stop Status click check all wait for all the entries to refresh and verify that all the entries are red 2 8 3 Loading a StarQuality Licence gt To load a licence 1 Place the licence file on the computer from which you activated the client 2 From Settings select Servers gt Licenses The Licences Configuration window is displayed 3 Click Add new and browse for the file containing the license 4 Click OK A list detailing the licenses is displayed 5 Verify that none of the entries in the license list are colored red StarQuality User Manual Installation Loadi
85. BPSK 1 2 to rate 8 64QAM 3 4 Downlink Rate Average Max Min From rate 1 BPSK 1 2 to rate 8 64QAM 3 4 Uptime BTS uptime in seconds 11 2 3 3 Common BTS KPIs Uptime 11 2 4 Codes for Threshold Setting Table 11 4 Syntax for TDD FDD AU Measurements Description Parameter FDD 35 SNMP FDD TFTP TDD Total Used Capacity Rate 1 WCR1 FCR1 TCR1 Total Used Capacity Rate 2 WCR2 FCR2 N A Total Used Capacity Rate 3 WCR3 FCR3 TCR3 Total Used Capacity Rate 4 WCR4 FCR4 TCR4 Total Used Capacity Rate 5 WCR5 FCR5 TCR5 Total Used Capacity Rate 6 WCR6 FCR6 TCR6 Total Used Capacity Rate 7 WCR7 FCR7 TCR7 Total Used Capacity Rate 8 WCR8 FCR8 TCR8 Subscription WMP FMP TMP StarQuality Q User Manual Device Specific Information i123 StarQuality Table 11 4 Syntax for TDD FDD AU Measurements Continued Description Parameter FDD 35 SNMP FDD TFTP TDD Air Link Occupation WOCC FOCC TOCC CIR Allocated WPC FPC TPC MIR CIR Allocated WPM FPM TPM Throughput WT FT TT Number Of Connected SUs WCS FCS TCS Table 11 5 Syntax for TDD FDD SU Measurements Description Parameter FDD 35 SNMP FDD TFTP TDD Rate max WSU3 FSU8 TSU6 Rate average FSU9 TSU7 Rate min FSU7 TSU5 SNR max WSU1 FSU5 TSU2 SNR average FSU6 TSU3 SNR min FSU4 TSU1 RSSI max WSU2 FSU2 TSU4 RSSI avera
86. Counter Description Errors Received frames per second Phy The number of Physical errors unidentified signals CRC The number of frames received from the wireless medium containing CRC errors Overrun The number of frames that were discarded because the receive rate exceeded the processing capability or the capacity of the Ethernet port Decrypt The number of frames that were not received properly due to a problem in the data decryption mechanism Other Errors other than previous counters Duplicate Frames Discarded The number of data frames discarded because multiple copies were received If an acknowledgement message is not received by the originating unit the same data frame can be received more than once Although duplicate frames are included in all counters that include data frames only the first copy is forwarded to the Ethernet port Errors Transmitted frames per second Frames dropped too many retries The number of dropped frames which are unsuccessfully retransmitted without being acknowledged until the maximum permitted number of retransmissions Underrun Events The number of times that transmission of a frame was aborted because the rate of submitting frames for transmission exceeds the available transmission capability Other TX Events The number of frames whose transmission was not completed or delayed due to a problem other than those represented by the other counters Inte
87. DD Throughput Report kk Oo Report mmm Report tdd tester TDD 10 0 16 40 SUs bd Figure 9 32 User Rights Modification StarQuality Q User Manual General Setting Options High Availability Performance 4 Select one or more items from either of these lists and move them to the other side by clicking on the appropriate arrow The program automatically filters out the elements whose parent already available in the hierarchy above is present For example if you mark all basic equipment and sites and move them to the right hand side of the window after saving the modification only the ROOT object the topmost will remain in the right list 9 8 3 High Availability Performance StarQuality is able to provide high availability as a result of using measurement server groups Different strategies must be applied depending on the number of machines serving StarQuality and its Oracle database However for all strategies except the non measuring server components it is recommended to install all components on the same machine with Oracle The report and threshold modules can be relocated to another machine if there is enough capacity StarQuality User Manual 8 0 Northbound Interface NBI Northbound Interface NBI In this chapter StarQuality Introduction on page 268 e mail Notifications of StarQuality Server Events on page 269 e mail Notifications and Traps of Threshold Crossing Eve
88. DING ANY PRODUCT EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE PAID FOR THAT PRODUCT BY THAT PARTY EXCEPT IN THE CASE OF A BREACH OF A PARTY S CONFIDENTIALITY OBLIGATIONS StarQuality vi User Manual Important Notice Important Notice This manual is delivered subject to the following conditions and restrictions StarQuality This manual contains proprietary information belonging to Alvarion Ltd Such information is supplied solely for the purpose of assisting properly authorized users of the respective Alvarion products No part of its contents may be used for any other purpose disclosed to any person or firm or reproduced by any means electronic and mechanical without the express prior written permission of Alvarion Ltd The text and graphics are for the purpose of illustration and reference only The specifications on which they are based are subject to change without notice The software described in this document is furnished under a license The software may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of that license Information in this document is subject to change without notice Corporate and individual names and data used in examples herein are fictitious unless otherwise noted Alvarion Ltd reserves the right to alter the equipment specifications and descriptions in this publication without prior notice No part of this publication shall be deemed to be part of any contract or warranty unless specifically incorporated by refe
89. Default measurement interval Created by Created when Last modified by Last modified at Discovery of Equipment under a Server Health Site 216 172 30 105 216 dadmin idadmin No server group definied 15 min admin 2009 03 01 14 21 15 admin 2009 03 01 14 21 15 Measurement type Disc free space Disc usage Disc free space Disc usage Disc free space Disc usage Index I Idev f Idevifd idevices devices devices Disc usage Name Interval Disc free space 15 min Disc usage 15 min dev fd Disc free space 15 min ldev fd Disc usage 15 min Jeunes Disc free space 15 min 15 min Figure 4 13 Network Discovery Results Unix Linux 9 To start collecting select from the Operations drop down menu Modify Equipment The following window is displayed StarQuality User Manual Network Discovery Discovery of Equipment under a Server Health Site L add new Measurement type an types zi Index 7 Alllogin H 7 All process o Figure 4 14 Activating Data Collection UNIX Parent site Name Description IP address User Password Keep collected data for days Timeout sec Retries Default measurement interval Choose an icon Server group Collect data SERVER HEALTH 216 ismin sl Additional measurements OK All login All process Other parameters Switched
90. Demand Reports By using the On demand reports the system creates and generates reports referring to data already existing in the database It is recommended to specify limited amount of data for the report as processing large amounts of data causes system overload 202 User Manual Reports On Demand Reports gt To create an On Demand report 1 From Reports select On Demand Reports the On demand selection path and settings window is displayed The items in the selection path become available as you specify the settings Selection path Je EE FREE Figure 8 8 On demand Reports Types E In the Report Type section choose either By Equipment Level By Measurement In this case select wether to group measurements together E When Which time period is used for the report 2 Click Search in the selection path the Search settings window is displayed Browser Om demand report DN Cl afaale Feste eeh ne Kaka ae GEERT Search by or st 07 urne S sg 2 ao aas zm putts al E no 2 am a a 2 Search Day Week Month Year z 4 a Chart setting S ee a Resets court Figure 8 9 On demand Reports Search 3 Specify the Search StarQuality 203 User Manual Reports x StarQuality On Demand Reports parent attribute No to search by equipment attribute Yes to search by parent attribute Field Leave Name Search enter strings to be searched All r
91. E Name and password for its Oracle user QUESTION QUESTION C ORACLI QUESTION QUESTION QUESTION C VORACL QUESTION INFO INFO StarQuality Checking Oracle schema Getting the default tablespace directory StarQuality Conf tablespace name SQ_CONF StarQuality Conf tablespace file E PRODUCT 10 2 0 ORADATA ORCL SQ_CONF dbf StarQuality Conf tablespace size 300M Creating the tablespace SQ_CONF this could take several minutes Oracle tablespace SQ_CONF created StarQuality Data tablespace name SQ_DATA StarQuality Data tablespace file E PRODUCT 10 2 0 ORADATA ORCL SQ_DATA dbf StarQuality Data tablespace size 10000M Creating the tablespace SQ_DATA this could take several minutes Creating the tablespace SQ_DATA this could take several minutes User Manual Installation 2 7 2 8 StarQuality QUESTION QUESTION INFO INFO Installing StarQuality Oracle tablespace SQ DATA created StarQuality Oracle user name SO StarQuality Oracle user password Creating the Oracle schema this could take several minutes Oracle user SQ created Finishing the Installation 1 The installer generates the schematic maps and exits INFO INFO bash 3 00 Redrawing schematic maps Installer ended 2 To load a licence and run StarQuality refer to Loading a StarQuality Licence on page 93
92. ET TT Tp NT ETT TT TTT NTT TT Variable name FDD SNMP Occupation SZ Go FDD SNMP Occupation Subname InMax Div with isn bs ek Monthly Average Annual aggregation postfoc Column link None z Cell link None z Over Description Maximum of the values for first formula ok Cancel Figure 8 6 Adding a New Variable StarQuality User Manual Reports E o StarQuality Regular Reports 11 Repeat for each variable a NOTE Set the order Assign the same order to variables you want to group Grouped variables share variable name and name they differ by subname Select a variable name from the drop down list of your pre defined variables See To create a report variable on page 197 Enter a meaningful name for the order group In cases it is applicable the name should specify if the measurement is an uplink or downlink value d NOTE Enter a meaningful subname for the subcolumn it is only visible on the report if there are at least two grouped columns Example of grouping according to steps a d Common Measurement name Utilization Common Name Utilization Downlink Subname Min for one variable Max for the other From the Field drop down list select the required field value Make sure that the field matches the names given above In applicable cases First formula always represe
93. IR Allocated Bits per second The sum of allocated CIR Committed Information Rate Downlink Uplink values for all the SUs in the sector Ethernet Throughput bits per second The average throughput per second on the Ethernet port on Downlink Uplink direction MIR Allocated bits per second The sum of allocated MIR Maximum Information Rate Downlink Uplink values for all the SUs in the sector Noise Floor dBm The average Noise Floor recorded by the unit Number of Connected SUs SUs with active services Retransmission The percentage of total number of retransmissions including all unsuccessful transmissions and retransmissions out of the total number of unicast frames transmitted over the wireless port Throughput bits per second The average throughput per second on the Radio port on Downlink Uplink direction Uptime hours BS uptime in hours 11 3 3 2 SU KPIs Table 11 7 BreezeACCESS VL Performance Counters Counter Description Concatenated Frames Receive frames per second The total number of concatenated frames received from the wireless medium including duplicate frames There are also separate counts for concatenated frames that include one frame Single two frames Double or more than two frames More Concatenated Frames Transmit frames per The total number of concatenated frames transmitted successfully second to the
94. IR in BS TOTAL DL MIR BS_DL_BYTES BS DL USED SEC 8 100 BS TOTAL UL MIR BS UL BYTES BS UL USED SEC 8 100 Number of Connected SU Count Value Number of SUs that have been connected to the BS for the whole 15 minute interval proceeding the PMTM file generation Repetition Ratio Downlink Ratio between aggregated CPE Uplink HARQ repetitions to aggregated Total Bursts SUM CPE_DL_HARQ_REPETITION SUM CPE_DL_TOTAL_BURSTS 100 SUM CPE_UL_HARQ_REPETITION SUM CPE_UL_TOTAL_BURSTS 100 Throughput Bits per Second Downlink Average sector throughput per BS each measurement Uplink represents the average BS_DL_BYTES 8 throughput of the passed BS_DL_USED_SEC sampling interval of 15 BS UL BYTES 8 minutes BS UL USED SEC Transfer Overhead Downlink Ratio between aggregated CPE HARQ NACKs to aggregated Uplink SUM CPE_DL_HARQ_NACK SUM CPE_DL_HARQ_ACK 100 SUM CPE_UL_HARQ_NACK SUM CPE_UL_HARQ_ACK 100 CPE HARQ ACKs StarQuality User Manual Device Specific Information Key Performance Indicators KPIs Table 11 22 Traffic Counters BreezeMAX Extreme Continued Counter Formula Members Description Transfer Ratio SUM CPE_DL_TOTAL_BURSTS SUM CPE_DL_TOTAL_BURSTS CPE_DL_DROP_BURSTS 100 SUM CPE_UL_TOTAL_BURSTS SUM CPE_UL_TOTAL_BURSTS CPE_UL_DROP_BURSTS 100 Downlink Ratio between aggregated C
95. It can automatically appear under basic equipment too if it contains a measurement running on the given equipment or a report summary for that equipment This parallel structure is used according to the settings under the Preferences menu item for the display of both measurements and thresholds filtered by site or equipment Contrary to this for the Reports menu item one can move along only the basic hierarchy Virtual sites and equipments can be private or public objects Administrator users can create both types Admin users can only create public objects Other users can only create private objects Restricted administrators can modify a public object if they created it The configuration follows the same principles and there is only one restriction only public virtual sites equipments and measurements can be placed under public virtual sites while only the private ones under private virtual sites StarQuality Gi User Manual General Setting Options Site and Equipment Configuration 93 2 E 9 3 2 1 StarQuality Site and Equipment Configuration The administration of the basic and virtual sites basic and virtual equipments and measurements is performed under the Site and equipment menu item Settings gt Site and equipment configuration You can also configure threshold settings limited to measurement thresholds on a single equipment only otherwise use the Settings gt Threshold menu item see Cu
96. Level View of Alarms rrnrennnnnnnonnnnnnvvenennnnvnnnnnnnnvnvnnnnnennnnnnnennen 189 Figure 7 8 Sample XLS of Alarm Table cciscsisscesincccsecnestscastdcceestoaseacantdvensnsead iencaontientaneanntereney 191 Figure 7 9 Sample XLS File of Chart Data eeernrrnnonennnnnnvnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnenennnnnennennenennnnn 192 Figure 8 1 Report Variables Window Example ccccceeseececeeeeeeeeeeseeneneeeeeeneneseeeneeeees 196 Figure 8 2 Adding New Report Varebles 2gzetetgedeugggerge ng eene eege en 197 Figure 8 3 Report View Configuration Window example rarnnnrrnnnnnnnnvnnnrnnrnnnnnrnrrrnnnnnnnnnnnnn 199 Figure 8 4 Creating a New Report View 199 Figure 8 5 Configuration Page REENEN 200 Figure 8 6 Adding a New Variable rrrnnnnnnnnrrornrnnnnnnnnvvvvnnennnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnenenenennnnnennnnn 200 Figure 8 7 Creating a New Report View Using the Copy From Option 202 Figure 8 8 On demand Reports Types rrnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnanvnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnennensnnennennnennnnne 203 Figure 8 9 On demand Reports Gearch uk 203 Figure 8 10 On demand Reports Measurement Types rrnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnrrnnnnrnvrrnnnrnnnnnnernnnrnnennr 204 Figure 8 11 On demand Reports Measurement Types Settings rrrrnnnrnnrrnnnnrrrrrnnnnnnnrnnnnn 205 Figure 8 12 On demand Reports Object Parameters rrrrrnnnrnvrrnnnnnnnrnnnnrnnrrnnnernrrrrnnrnnnrnnenr 205 Figure 8 13 On demand Reports
97. MTP server as described in Mail Server Configuration on page 95 Step 2 PVSR_EMAIL_ADDRESS is not mandatory To set e mail notifications 1 In order to receive e mail notifications define the address list as described in Setting E mail Addresses Admin only on page 243 2 From the list select the specific recipients for each threshold or threshold template as described in Setting Alarm Thresholds on page 165 SNMP Trap Notifications StarQuality Threshold Crossing Alerts TCA mechanism provides an interface From which SNMP traps can be sent to other management systems in cases of actual threshold crossing events The traps are constructed according to the designated StarQuality MIB supplied with the installation CD ready for uploading to any trap receiving management system Trap can be sent to one or more recipients and with different timetables Refer to Setting Alarm Thresholds on page 165 Q User Manual Northbound Interface NBI SOAP Interface 10 4 StarQuality SOAP Interface StarQuality SOAP interface enables various NBI operations via third party applications A prerequisite for enabling SOAP operations is activation of the StarQuality SOAP server as described in Activating SOAP Server on page 98 For description and instructions on available operations refer to the StarQuality SOAP Manual User Manual ee i Device Specific Information Device Specific
98. Measurements WiMAX Equipment Measurements Hud StarQuality WiMAX Equipment Measurements KPIs Key Performance Indicators exist for three types of entities HM Slot also referred to as AU sector BS E SU also referred to as MS CPE HM NPU also referred to as BTS in common measurements For specific device information refer to Chapter 11 User Manual Viewing Measurements Measurements Browsing Options Sud Measurements Browsing Options You can find a specific device data using three methods E Navigating the path from the Measurement menu click ROOT or Network Monitored SUs sites and then click the equipment icons HM Searching for a specific equipment see Searching Measurements on page 158 E Creating a specific sub menu as a shortcut see Saving Items as A Submenu on page 161 StarQuality User Manual Viewing Measurements Measurements Display Options 5 4 5 4 1 Measurements Display Options Display Types Three display types are available in the View group E Icon as in Figure 5 1 the elements of the hierarchy level under the selected item are shown with a big icon and name up to 5 items in a row The navigation can be continued by clicking on the icons E List the elements appear with a small icon and name which makes it possible to view many objects on a small screen E Detailed elements are listed under each other with a small icon name and description Navi
99. OWED BY LAW THE WARRANTIES AND REMEDIES SET FORTH IN THIS AGREEMENT ARE EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS EXPRESS OR IMPLIED EITHER IN FACT OR BY OPERATION OF LAW STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO WARRANTIES TERMS OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE SATISFACTORY QUALITY CORRESPONDENCE WITH DESCRIPTION NON INFRINGEMENT AND ACCURACY OF INFORMATION GENERATED ALL OF WHICH ARE EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMED ALVARION WARRANTIES HEREIN RUN ONLY TO PURCHASER AND ARE NOT EXTENDED TO ANY THIRD PARTIES ALVARION NEITHER ASSUMES NOR AUTHORIZES ANY OTHER PERSON TO ASSUME FOR IT ANY OTHER LIABILITY IN CONNECTION WITH THE SALE INSTALLATION MAINTENANCE OR USE OF ITS PRODUCTS Limitation of Liability a ALVARION SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO THE PURCHASER OR TO ANY THIRD PARTY FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFITS LOSS OF USE INTERRUPTION OF BUSINESS OR FOR ANY INDIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL PUNITIVE OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND WHETHER ARISING UNDER BREACH OF CONTRACT TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE STRICT LIABILITY OR OTHERWISE AND WHETHER BASED ON THIS AGREEMENT OR OTHERWISE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES b TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW IN NO EVENT SHALL THE LIABILITY FOR DAMAGES HEREUNDER OF ALVARION OR ITS EMPLOYEES OR AGENTS EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE PAID FOR THE PRODUCT BY PURCHASER NOR SHALL THE AGGREGATE LIABILITY FOR DAMAGES TO ALL PARTIES REGAR
100. PE Total Bursts to aggregated CPE Uplink Total and Dropped Bursts 11 6 3 2 BTS KPIs Table 11 23 BTS KPIs Counter Members Description Uptime Uptime Time since last system boot in hours 11 6 3 3 SU KPIs Table 11 24 SU KPIs Counter Members Description Rate Downlink Uplink Rate Min Average Max Modulation Rate for each MS The Min and max Rate sampled in the integration period of 15min Average is calculated by dividing by number of samples RSSI Downlink Uplink dBm Min Average Max RSSI is sampled from each burst Min and max RSSI value sampled in the integration period of 15min Average is calculated by dividing by number of samples SNR Downlink Uplink dB Min Average Max SNR Min and max SNR value sampled in the integration period of 15min Average is calculated by dividing by number of samples SU CIR Allocated Bits per Second CPE TOTAL DL GIR 1000 CPE TOTAL UL GIR 1000 Downlink Aggregation of maximum provisioned traffic of CIR services for each CPE Uplink during the 15 minutes period StarQuality User Manual Device Specific Information Key Performance Indicators KPIs Table 11 24 SU KPIs Continued Counter Members Description Su Drop Ratio Downlink Ratio between number of dropped bursts and total bursts dropped and succeeded for each CPE counted in the sampled CPE DL DROP BURSTS pe
101. Progress i This page displays the progress of the download or installation Installing libdb4 5 4 5 20 2 2 ust bin cygbz2 1 d Progress Total Disk Es Figure 2 8 Cygwin Installation Process 13 Click Finish Cygwin Setup Installation Status and Create Icons B lsl x Create Icons Tell setup if you want it to create a few icons for convenient access to the ze Cygwin environment IV Create icon on Desktop IV Add icon to Start Menu Installation Status Installation Complete Figure 2 9 Cygwin Installation Completion StarQuality User Manual Installation gt e 2 2 2 1 StarQuality Installing StarQuality To download and install Cygwin from the Internet Make sure the Cygwin version you download and use includes the following packages Sapache bash coreutils cygutils expat gcc core gcc mingw g less libexpat1 libiconv2 libncurses8 libreadline6 make openssh ping termcap tzcode which Installing StarQuality Overview base files binutils crypt cygwin findutils gcc g grep libbz2 1 libexpat1 devel libintl3 libpere0 libwrapO mingw runtime openssl sed terminfo vim zlib base passwd bzip2 cygrunsrv editrights gawk gcc mingw core gzip libdb4 5 libgdbm4 libintl8 libpoptO login minires perl version 5 8 x x tar texinfo w32api This Installation type is applicable when Installing StarQuality on Windows server
102. Q lt Y N gt N y The OS user of Oracle oracle oracle Found Oracle home export home oracle orac le product 1 2 db 1 ORACLE HOME environment variable export home orac le oracle product 1 2 db 11 INFO gf INFO e OK INFO INFO INFO QUESTION CONFIRM INFO e forever QUESTION INFO INFO Checking the Oracle home export home oracle oracle product 1 2 dh Oracle home export home orac le oracle product 1 2 db 1 seems to bh Checking Oracle version Found Oracle version 1 Detected 32 bit Oracle Oracle SYSTEM user password 1 Confirm the password If you drop the Oracle user Q then your measurement data will be gon Are you sure that you want to drop Oracle user SQ lt Y N gt N y Dropping the Oracle user Q this could take several minutes User dropped INFO QUESTION INFO es INFO Tablespace INFO QUESTION INFO es INFO Tablespac INFO QUESTION QUESTION seen ee SN INFO INFO INFO INFO INFO QUESTION INFO INFO INFO INFO bas h 3 tt Done Do you want to drop the Oracle tablespace SEO DATA lt Y N gt N y Dropping the Oracle tablespace SO DATA this could take several minut dropped Done Do you want to drop the Oracle tablespace SQ_CONF lt Y N gt N y Dropping the Oracle tablespace SQ_CONF this could take several minut dropped Done Do you want to restore the Apache configuration lt Y N gt N n Do you want to delete the
103. SS elements App server and managed 69 TFTP From Managed equipment to equipment StarQuality App server and client 8080 Inbound Outbound between client and server Oracle communication client As installed From StarQuality to Oracle server Default 1521 and from Oracle to StarQuality Sending requests to 16162 SNMP AlvariSTAR in order to reach KPI 2 3 1 3 Installing Oracle Server Follow these guidelines HM Consult Table 2 1 for the correct Oracle Server version E Install Oracle Server according to instructions issued by Oracle corporation E Make sure that the database is set to a minimum of 170 processes E During StarQuality installation the Oracle server must be running and the database connection from the StarQuality should be available HM To test connectivity to the database server from the StarQuality machine use the sqlplus utility as follows Assuming that the database SID is testme and system password is oracle switch to the command prompt on Windows or use a console on Solaris logged in as the Oracle user and enter the following command sqlplus system oracle testme If the SQL prompt is displayed connectivity to the database server is confirmed Any error message should be reported to and resolved by the DBA Enter exit or quit to complete the procedure StarQuality User Manual Installation 2 3 1 4 StarQuality Pre installation Tasks E The followi
104. Select Settings gt Site and Equipment Configuration 2 Select the site that should contain the new one then from the Creating drop down menu select New Site StarQuality User Manual General Setting Options Equipment Configuration 3 Fill in the site name its description and choose the corresponding icon and server group Click OK 4 To modify a site click either edit or del next to the site Only empty sites can be deleted b Alarms Ir Measurements Reports I Settings Browser Site and equipment confi 4 Eis ROOT gt FDD SNMP gt 10 0 16 20 SUs Operstion Parent site 10 0 16 20 SUs Name Description Choose an icon Ol Jicon_site ong 7 Server group no server group definied zl oK Cancel Figure 9 2 Adding a New Site 9 3 2 3 Creating and Editing Virtual Sites Saa 9 3 3 1 StarQuality The creation and editing of virtual sites is performed similarly to non virtual sites See above When adding a virtual site select the New public or New private site item from the pull down menu The main difference is that under virtual sites basic sites or equipment cannot be created the latter can be only linked therefore no server groups can be specified Equipment Configuration Creating New Equipment from Template The only templates available are either those not assigned to any site general templates or templates that are assigned to the current s
105. Sep27 Sep27 Sep28 Sep28 Sep29 Sep29 Sep30 Sep30 OctO1 OctO1 GctO2 OctO2 OctO3 OctO3 Oct04 OctO4 OctOS Oct 05 2008 09 26 03 30 2008 10 05 11 30 Ml Uplink max 39 91 avg 31 49 min 23 70 last 34 67 M Downlink mas 17 61 avg 15 91 min 12 81 last 16 87 Monthly 2 hour Export to XLS View Measurement Figure 7 7 The Equipment Level View of Alarms StarQuality User Manual Threshold Crossing Alarms Monitoring Filtering Alarms 7 2 2 3 Chart View This view can only be selected if the current time interval is not the real time Auto refresh view that is for historical time intervals that do not contain the current time instant 7 2 3 Filtering Alarms In the alarms browser the third group Filters allows the specification of filter conditions of alarms Filtering is available using the following types Table 7 4 Filtering Types Type Description Name The name of the threshold which typically contains the name of the corresponding equipment such as E1909 low availability The usual and _ characters can be used here Most useful in the List view Level A dropdown list used to filter on the severity level Critical Major Warning Minor Type A dropdown list used to filter on the threshold type Grouped A dropdown list used to set whether the normal and or the grouped alarms should be displayed Acknowledged Display acknowledged alarms Yes No StarQuality User Man
106. Setup Select Packages iof xi Select Packages Select packages to install Lg C Exp View Category Caego New 18S See Package EI All 4 Install DI Admin A Install Audio 4 Install E Base amp Install E Database 4 Install Devel 4 Install E Doc 4 Install Editors amp Install Gnome 4 Install JV Hide obsolete packages lt Back Cancel Figure 2 28 Select Packages Window All Install StarQuality User Manual Installation Pre installation Tasks 9 Verify that all the entries under the All main package have also been changed to Install see Figure 2 7 10 Scroll down to the Perl package and expand it using the sign 11 Check the sub package under Perl If it is other than 5 8 x x e g skip click on it to change it to the required 5 8 x x see Figure 2 8 NOTE Ed The Perl version must be 5 8 x x otherwise it does not meet the StarQuality requirements In this case use a different cygwin installation package Cygwin Setup Select Packages oj E Select Packages Select packages to install C Keep C Prev Cun C Exp View Category Caso New ee See Paa O J Editors 4 Install Gnome 4 Install Interpreters 4 Install Libs 43 Install Math Ar Install Net 4 Install Perl EI Perl amp Install Version 43 5 8 8 4 nja 9 972k perl Python 4 Install of 4 gt JV Hide obsolete packages pen Figure 2 29 Select Packages Win
107. a Agent Nyswi RTT MinMax view Jaga Agent Nvsw2 Availabilty view Jaga Agent Nvsw2 RTT view Jaga Agent Nvsw2 RTT MinMax Back Figure 9 25 Missing Measurements at a Given Time StarQuality 257 User Manual General Setting Options Audit Trail 9 7 StarQuality Audit Trail The application records each configuration modification equipment site measurement creation modification deletion modification of reports and thresholds etc that can be displayed under the Audit Trail menu item The administrators are allowed to view every change the restricted administrators are allowed to view only those changes which were made by themselves The other users do not have access to this functionality It also saves the name of the user who made the modification It either equals to the user name at the WEB interface or it is a system value if it was an automatic modification e g an interface was cancelled in the equipment To start an audit trail query 1 From Settings select Audit trail The Audit Trail query page is displayed Figure 9 26 Audit trail ojx Audit trail entries Object type aites sd Name Parent name Modified by To Operation all types zl Max results 500 OK Figure 9 26 Audit Trail Query 250 User Manual General Setting Options Audit Trail 2 Enter the filter conditions Object type Select a type from a scroll down menu Possible values All no
108. activate or deactivate data collection for any equipment type 1 Click the site icon to enter the site 2 For each equipment repeat the following a Click edit next to the equipment you want to activate The following window is displayed measurement types themselves may vary according to the specific equipment SU BTS Server Health element StarQuality Parent site Fore sl Name 10 0 16 10_ Description IP address 10 0 16 10 Community public Keep collected E data for days Timeout sec 8 a Retries Default measurement 15 min we interval 15 min Choose an icon Jicon_equip png E Server group WiMAX FDD TFTP WiMAX FDD TFTP Collect data NW Additional measurements a Pei Measurement type Name er Collected All types Zj Index e 1 OK parameters Switched Max Interval data vei IV air Link Occupation 1 Slot 1 Air Link Occupation 0 P 100 15min 93 D IV air Link Occupation 3 Slot 3 Air Link Occupation SS B f 100 15 min s3 B Figure 4 4 Activating Data Collection b Select or deselect the Collect Data checkbox at the bottom of the upper table c Select or deselect the measurements you want to activte deactivate in the lower table d Click OK e Go back one level in the navigation path and verify that the equipment line line is no longer red acivated or is red if deactivated Figure 4 5 User Manual Network Discovery Activat
109. ality installation refer to Table 2 1 to ensure that this is the correct installation for your system Check that you have performed all the tasks outlined in Section 2 4 1 below This installation type involves the installation of the following components E Oracle server on a separate machine E Oracle client on the StarQuality machine E cygwin E StarQuality Pre installation Tasks Disk Partitioning For large network configurations using external Oracle setups disk partitioning is recommended Table 2 6 Disk Partitioning Physical Disk Volume Setup Physical disk 1 Volume 1 RAIDO OS Star Quality SW Oracle client SW Physical disk 2 Physical disk 3 Physical disk 4 Configuring Network Ports The following ports must be open between the server machine client machine managed network equipment and other NMS OSS elements User Manual Installation Pre installation Tasks Table 2 7 Network Ports Use Port Protocol Direction App server and managed 161 SNMP Outbound towards NE equipment App server managed 162 SNMP Outbound towards NMS OSS equipment and other elements NMS OSS elements App server and managed 69 TFTP From Managed equipment to equipment StarQuality App server and client 8080 Inbound Outbound between client and server Oracle communication client As installed From StarQuality to Oracle server Default 1521 and
110. all DI Admin A Install Audio 4 Install E Base amp Install E Database 4 Install Devel 4 Install E Doc 4 Install Editors amp Install Gnome 4 Install JV Hide obsolete packages lt Back Cancel Figure 2 6 Select Packages Window All Install User Manual Installation Pre installation Tasks 9 Verify that all the entries under the All main package have also been changed to Install see Figure 2 7 10 Scroll down to the Perl package and expand it using the sign 11 Check the sub package under Perl If it is other than 5 8 x x e g skip click on it to change it to the required 5 8 x x see Figure 2 8 NOTE Ed The Perl version must be 5 8 x x otherwise it does not meet the StarQuality requirements In this case use a different cygwin installation package Cygwin Setup Select Packages oj E Select Packages Select packages to install C Keep C Prev Cun C Exp View Category Caso New ee See Paa O J Editors 4 Install Gnome 4 Install Interpreters 4 Install Libs 43 Install Math Ar Install Net 4 Install Perl EI Perl amp Install Version 43 5 8 8 4 nja 9 972k perl Python 4 Install of 4 gt JV Hide obsolete packages pen Figure 2 7 Select Packages Window Perl Version 12 Click Next the installation proceeds until completed StarQuality User Manual Installation Pre installation Tasks 47 Cygwin Setup oix
111. allation Installing StarQuality Jg StarQuality Setup ME E Oracle connection Please fill in the Oracle tablespace parameters Conf tablespace SO CONF File CAORACLE PRODUCTI 10 2 DJORADATALORCLI5Q CONF dbf Size 300M Data tablespace SO DATA File C ORACLE PRODUCT 10 2 OJORADATAORCLISQ DATA dbf Size 10000M fdullsoft Install System v2 37 Figure 2 20 Oracle Connection Tablespace Parameters 13 Click Next The Oracle user parameters are displayed M StarQuality Setup Bisi E Oracle connection Please fill in the Oracle user parameters User name 5Q User password oe Confirm password ee Nullsoft Install System v2 37 Back Cancel Figure 2 21 Oracle Connection User Parameters 14 Click Next The installer displays the Setup wizard and completes the installation StarQuality User Manual Installation StarQuality Installing StarQuality StarQuality Setup fala Completing the StarQuality Setup Wizard StarQuality has been installed on your computer Click Finish to close this wizard Gancel Figure 2 22 StarQuality Setup Wizard Completing Installation 15 Click Finish to close the wizard 16 To load a licence and run StarQuality refer to Loading a StarQuality Licence on page 93 Running StarQuality on Windows on page 90 User Manual Installation 2 3 Sech 2 3 1 1 2 3 1 2 StarQua
112. allation Tasks Physical Disk Volume Setup Physical disk 1 Volume 1 OS StarQuality SW Oracle SW Physical disk 2 Physical disk 3 Physical disk 4 Physical disk 5 Physical disk 6 Physical disk 7 Physical disk 8 Physical disk 9 Physical disk 10 Volume 2 RAID 0 Oracle tablespaces redo logs etc entire SID Configuring Kernel Parameters for Solaris x86 1 Add the following entries to the etc system file and reboot the system set shmsys shminfo shmmax 4294967295 set shmsys shminfo shmmni 100 set semsys seminfo semmni 100 set semsys seminfo semmsl 256 2 Verify a minimum of 10 GB swap space Configuring Network Ports The following ports must be open between the server machine client machine managed network equipment and other NMS OSS elements User Manual Installation Pre installation Tasks Table 2 13 Network Ports Use Port Protocol Direction App server and managed 161 SNMP Outbound towards NE equipment App server managed 162 SNMP Outbound towards NMS OSS equipment and other elements NMS OSS elements App server and managed 69 TFTP From Managed equipment to equipment StarQuality App server and client 8080 Inbound Outbound between client and server Sending requests to 16162 SNMP AlvariSTAR in order to reach KPI 2 6 1 4 Installing Oracle Server Follow these guideline
113. alling Cygwin Cygwin is a UNIX like environment for Windows StarQuality operation commands must always be executed from a cygwin window The Cygwin Installation files can be downloaded from the internet see To download and install Cygwin from the Internet on page 20 or Alvarion FTP Server see below To download and install Cygwin from the Alvarion FTP server Download the CygwinFromWwwGoh4Com zip file from ftp downloads alvarion com StarSuite Star Quality Installations Username and password required when connecting as alvarioncustomer Extract the zip file into a folder with a path that does not include spaces From the extracted files run the setup exe file The Cygwin Net Release Setup Program window is displayed User Manual Installation Pre installation Tasks Cygwin Setup Eat EN Cygwin Net Release Setup Program This setup program is used for the initial installation of the Cygwin environment as well as all subsequent updates Make sure to remember where you saved it The pages that follow will quide you through the installation Please note that Cygwin consists of a large number of packages spanning wide variety of purposes We only install a base set of packages by default You can always run this program at any time in the future to add remove or upgrade packages as necessary Cc Setup exe version 2 573 2 3 Copyright 2000 2007 http www cygwin com Figure 2 42 Cygwin Net Re
114. ally to reflect the current status Click OK to select the desired element User Manual General Setting Options Setting E mail Addresses Admin only x 9 4 3 2 9 4 3 3 9 4 4 StarQuality NOTE The OK button appears only if all the necessary object pull down menus have been displayed according to the report variable or measurement selected in the first step For example when measuring communication traffic this button appears only if a piece of equipment on a site and a measurement under that have been selected Deleting Chart Elements Users can delete a chart element using the de1 link However note the following limitations E Ifthe user is not administrator and the user rights to an object are revoked then the corresponding private chart elements are deleted too E When deleting an object it is automatically removed from all chart definitions If a chart becomes empty after such an operation then the chart is deleted automatically as well Viewing Charts By navigating the site equipment hierarchy starting from the Measurements menu item all private charts can be accessed and also public charts for which the user has access rights Setting E mail Addresses Admin only All users except limited ones may set up one or more e mail address to which the system can send notifications on threshold violations A prerequisite to the actual e mail sending is that the StarQuality server has been configur
115. anaged 162 SNMP Outbound towards NMS OSS equipment and other elements NMS OSS elements App server and managed 69 TFTP From Managed equipment to equipment StarQuality App server and client 8080 Inbound Outbound between client and server Sending requests to 16162 SNMP AlvariSTAR in order to reach KPI 2 5 2 Installing StarQuality StarQuality can be installed on a Solaris 10 x86 operating system using the command line installer For additional information on the installer commands and parameters refer to Command Line Installer General Information on page 96 All operations should be done while logged in as root user gt To install StarQuality 1 Runthe installer application StarQuality v3 0 en bin either directly from the installation DVD or from a directory to which the file was transferred using FTP 2 The following sections describe the installation process and details 2 5 2 1 Basic Checks The installer checks the following details E Version of the operating system E Required packages StarQuality Q User Manual Installation Installing StarQuality E Version of Perl and the options used to build the Perl binary If the application detects an error during these checks then depending on the level of error it either immediately terminates or asks whether it should continue or not Always answer No and restart the installation StarQuality v2 e Command lin
116. and lists these potentially affected thresholds for approval Figure 6 9 Threshold template configuration There are 3 thresholds based on this template see below Do you want to apply the following changes to them as well Name New value E mail amos Thresholds Figure 6 9 Message on Template based Threshold Modification User Manual Setting Alarm Thresholds Editing a Template based Threshold Local Change 6 4 2 StarQuality The settings made here will override any local change in each of these thresholds To avoid loosing such local changes you may consider modifying the template and not the threshold itself Clock OK to save the modification the list of threshold templates reappears Editing a Template based Threshold Local Change Editing the threshold template itself will override any local change in thresholds To avoid loosing such local changes you may consider modifying the template and not the threshold itself To edit a template based threshold 1 From Settings select Threshold gt Configuration The Threshold list is displayed 2 Select a specific threshold and click edit the following message appears D se Threshold configuration 03 Tvom The threshokd is based on the template FDD SNMP OCCUPATION If someone will modifiy the template later on then might overwrite some of the values based on that users choise Are you sure you want to modify it ox anced Figure 6 10 Message
117. and or HTTPS by default TCP 80 and 443 StarQuality WEB server StarQuality WEB server The port of the chart server by default TCP 4444 The chart server module should always be located on a WEB server so the connection need to be made only on the local machine StarQuality application manager SMTP server SMTP port and SQLLDR module server TPC 25 StarQuality server Measured equipments SNMP port UDP 161 StarQuality server External trap receiver SNMP trap port UDP 162 StarQuality measurement server Measured Unix Linux SSH TCP 22 equipments StarQuality measurement server Measured Oracle equipments Oracle SQL Net by default TCP 1521 Machines using SOAP interface PVSR SOAP module server Port of the SOAP server by default TCP 8082 2 9 2 Mail Server Configuration 1 Open the file CONFIG_INI PM E Windows C cygwin opt starquality etc E Solaris opt starquality etc StarQuality User Manual Installation Command Line Installer General Information 2 If required edit the following fields SSMTP_SERVER localhost SPVSR_EMAIL_ADDRESS StarQuality SSMTP_AUTH user pwd SMTP SERVER IP of the SMTP server through which the application sends the e mails If this is not entered e mails will not be sent NOTE x The SMTP server has to comply with the following E Connection between StarQuality and the server on Port 25 E If the SMTP server requires us
118. ans that collection is activated by default StarQuality User Manual Network Discovery Discovery of Equipment under a Server Health Site Name a2 IP address 172 30 105 210 16162 Community public Inherited server group SNMP name semen sure Previous server None Collect data Yes Keep collected 355 data for days Timeout sec 10 Retries 1 SNMP version SNMPv1 Default measurement min interval Uptime O days 01 06 52 sysDescr 0 sysContact H sysName 0 sysLocation 0 sysObjectID 1 3 6 1 4 1 12394 1 260 Created by admin Created when 2009 02 08 16 06 08 Last modified by admin Last modified at 2009 02 08 16 06 08 Interface table Index IfDescr Name Order a Interval Traffic Error Additional measurements Measurement type Index Name Interval Darband Minns Cane n Darband Minne Maune 1E min Figure 4 7 Data Collection Active 9 Ifyou wish to edit the specific counters collected select Modify Equipment from the Operations drop down menu 10 choose specific measurements or all measurements by selecting the corresponding check boxes 11 Scroll down and click OK to implement changes StarQuality User Manual Network Discovery Discovery of Equipment under a Server Health Site gt To add an Oracle database server 1 Make sure the following prerequisites are available Setup and configuration Network connection between StarQuality and Oracle machines Information Oracle TNS nam
119. ansmissions Underrun Events The number of times that transmission of a frame was aborted because the rate of submitting frames for transmission exceeds the available transmission capability Other TX Events The number of frames whose transmission was not completed or delayed due to a problem other than those represented by the other counters Internally discarded MIR CIR The number of data frames received from the Ethernet port that were discarded by the MIR CIR mechanism to avoid exceeding the maximum permitted information rate Ethernet Throughput bits per second The average throughput per second on the Ethernet port on Downlink Uplink direction Frames Received frames per second The total number of data frames received from the wireless medium including duplicate frames Frames Submitted frames per second The total number of data frames submitted to the internal bridge for transmission to the wireless medium The count does not include control and wireless management frames or retransmissions There are also separate counts for each priority queue through which the frames were routed High Mid and Low StarQuality User Manual Device Specific Information Codes for Threshold Setting Table 11 7 BreezeACCESS VL Performance Counters Continued Counter Description Noise Floor dBm The average Noise Floor recorded by the unit Retransmission The percen
120. ar to change the month Alternatively select a month and year using the drop down menus see Figure 8 15 To change the type of time interval click on the Day Week Month Year text links at the bottom Select the actual time interval by clicking on one of the displayed days Figure 8 15 Calendar views day week month and year for selecting the time interval StarQuality User Manual Reports Setting the Report Range and Display gt To set report display options 1 Inthe Settings area at the bottom of the Browser select the type of report from the Type drop down list Table only Grouped Separated Sort by 2 Select the Show Date in Column option to display if the report includes dates NOTE Ed These settings do not affect the export of reports to xls files StarQuality 209 User Manual Reports Bulk Export Wizard Exporting Data to XLS Files 8 4 Bulk Export Wizard Exporting Data to XLS Files The Bulk Export is a wizard driven utility used for exporting data from the StarQuality database into xls files according to the following user defined cross sections E Timeframe up to one week E Network elements Type SU AU or common BTS data number of exported lines is limited to 65 000 Technology FDD FDD SNMP TDD 4Motion Ver 2 5M and 3 0 VL Extreme The system enables choosing specific elements from the list of NEs matching the above conditions The xls file can be viewed
121. as in the manual creation of the equipment description IP address equipment IP address Community Equipment read SNMP community Keep data for days The value of the appropriate equipment parameter Default interval The value of the appropriate equipment parameter Next run The next time the system will try to configure the the equipment Run cycle minutes In case of an unsuccessful attempt the time period in minutes before retrying StarQuality User Manual Network Discovery Scheduled Configuration Scheduled configuration 1 items found Default Site Template Equipment Equipment IP collected Run cycle name description address EEE data for nise sne E EE minutes FDD si SS SS 5 io ona 2009 03 02 edit del now SNMP WiMAXFDD 10 0 16 200 93 15min icon_equip png 12 17 32 60 StarQuality 1 POP TT nen 100 v 4 Figure 4 17 Scheduled Configuration Do one if the following To modify the task parameters click edit The same parameters except for the retrying time can be modified as at template based creation The IP address SNMP Community and SNMP version fields are also displayed To delete a scheduled task click del To try and execute the entry immediately and not wait for the next run click now Oo User Manual N E Viewing Measurements Viewing Measurements In this chapter StarQuality Introduction on page 147 WiMAX Equipment
122. ation prompts for the operating system user utilized during the Oracle installation This part can take up to 30 minutes depending on the computer characteristics After providing it the application tries to find an Oracle user on the machine Only if such a user does not exist will the installer prompt for the installation of internal Oracle User Manual Installation Installing StarQuality elief in addition to all other remedies that may be available in law at y or otherwise If you have any questions concerning this Agreement please contact us at wiw alvarion com ATT Legal Department E mail legal alvarion com E Do you agree to the licence terms Y N y The perl usr bin perl is the same as the usr local bin perl The OS user of Oracle oracle Oracle user oracle doesn t exist Do you want to install Oracle lt Y N gt N y Embeded Oracle install supported Please specify Oracle 1 installer directory The directory have to contains both setup and patch install_directory 16261_database_solx86_64 database runInstaller p6816189_16264_Solaris86 64 Diski runInstaller tmp sq2 5 Setup db export home downloads sq2 5 Setup db Please specifie Oracle home directory fexport home orac le ora config file tmp starquality scripts_deploy oraparam properties StarQuality v2 5 4 en bin line 2639 tmp starquality scripts deploy oraparam propert ies var starquality oraparam properties No such file or direc
123. ator Compare value Static value interpreted with the same measurement unit as the one displayed on the measurement chart If there is a single measurement in the sub expression the application draws a horizontal line on the measurement chart at the compare value Vaseline value the average of the measured values calculated with the specified cycle and resolution or a multiple of the standard deviation Frequency In how many samples Based on the last x cycles Match in sample Sample size 3 Click the Add to link The application inserts the required element at the current cursor position in the text which can be of one of the following two types depending on the values of the fields Ifthe compare value is filled the application inserts a complete sub expression element namely selected_measurement_code operator compare_value frequency in how many Ifthe compare value is not filled the application inserts only the code of the selected measurement StarQuality User Manual Setting Alarm Thresholds Generating the Expression Using Input Fields 4 Anytime during the editing process you can click on the Validate link to check whether the expression has the required syntax If the syntax is invalid an error message is displayed and if it is valid the user readable format of the expression is displayed in the validate field Usually only the following part of the Perl syn
124. blespaces in the Database and the Oracle User The installer prompts for the following and creates creates the tablespaces E Name file name and size parameters for its configuration amd data tablespaces Leave name and size as prompted but point to the partition as defined in the required Partitioning table E Name and password for its Oracle user QUES INFO INFO INFO QUES QUES INFO INFO ION ION ION ION ION ION ION ION Checking Oracle schema Getting the default tablespace directory StarQuality Conf tablespace name SQ_CONF StarQuality Conf tablespace file C ORACLE PRODUCT 10 2 0 ORADATA ORCL SQ_CONF dbf StarQuality Conf tablespace size 300M Creating the tablespace SQ_CONF this could take several minutes Oracle tablespace SQ_CONF created StarQuality Data tablespace name SQ_DATA StarQuality Data tablespace file C ORACLE PRODUCT 10 2 0 ORADATA ORCL SQ_DATA dbf StarQuality Data tablespace size 10000M Creating the tablespace SQ_DATA this could take several minutes Creating the tablespace SQ_DATA this could take several minutes Oracle tablespace SQ_DATA created StarQuality Oracle user name SQ StarQuality Oracle user password Creating the Oracle schema this could take several minutes Oracle user SQ created Finishing the Installation 1 The installer generates the schematic ma
125. ce From Settings select Site and Equipment Configuration Click the Server Health icon to enter its site User Manual Network Discovery StarQuality Discovery of Equipment under a Server Health Site From the Creation drop down menu select Add Equipment from Template Select the template upon which to base the equipment setup Default Unix Linux Click OK A basic setup template page is displayed Template name Default Unix Linux Equipment name Equipment description IP address User Password Timeout sec Retries Default measurement 15 min z interval lad Choose an icon icon_equip png v Timeout sec Configured Add immediately to job queue OK Cancel Figure 4 12 Default Unix Linux Template Fill in the required information for parameter information and description refer to Discovery of WiMAX Devices on page 125 Name and description free text IP address lt ip address gt User lt root gt Password lt root password gt Leave all other fields with their default values Click OK Discovery is running and can take up a few minutes The following window is displayed Red fields indicate that collection is not activated by default User Manual Network Discovery Name IP address User Password Server group Server Previous server Collect data Keep collected data for days
126. cense agreement Please read the agreement carefully StarQuality User Manual Installation Installing StarQuality isi Es License Agreement Please review the license terms before installing StarQuality Press Page Down to see the rest of the agreement This program contains free of charge third party Java Perl and NSIS software libraries as well a Cygwin running environment The detailed list of components the detailed license files and sources can be Found in the third party directory on the installer CD By clicking I Agree you acknowledge that your use of these software is governed by the terms of the respective program licenses SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT the Agreement READ CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THE SOFTWARE vi If you accept the terms of the agreement click I Agree to continue You must accept the agreement to install StarQuality Nullsoft Install System v2 42 lt Back Cancel Figure 2 11 Licence Agreement 5 Click Next the wizard displays components to install M StarQuality Setup Mile x Choose Components Choose which features of StarQuality you want to install Check the components you want to install and uncheck the components you don t want to install Click Next to continue Description Position your mouse over Component EG see its description Select components to install Space required 185 6MB Nullsoft Install System v2 42 lt
127. ces as required Measurement view select the default view for the site and equipment configurations For every page the view can be changed temporarily with the small icons located at the top of the page Icons Large icons representing the sites and equipment up to five ina row List Small icons representing the sites and equipment up to five in a row Detailed a single element per row with the following columns First column The element icon this differentiates the equipment from the sites Name The name of the element Description The description of the element Equipment data Used only for equipment contains all measurement server specific data of the equipment e g community for SNMP 234 User Manual General Setting Options Customizing Display Preferences Non Administrator Users Only StarQuality E Virtual site equipment hierarchy This controls whether the private and public virtual or the default hierarchy should be displayed below the Measurements gt Current measurements submenu The possible settings are Private and original Public and original Private public and original default Only private Only public Private and public Single select entry If this option is set then Under the Equipment Search menu item the equipment will be immediately displayed if the search has a single result only Below the Current measurements menu item
128. chart administrator 2008 09 22 16 55 24 Insert Chart member Slot 1Free first chart administrator 2008 09 22 16 58 02 Back Figure 9 27 Audit Trail Entries 4 For update type changes the first column also contains a view link Click it to display the exact description that contains the modified value in addition to the above elements Audit trail D Gs Audit trail entries Operation Update Object type Chart member Name Uptime BEE SS Modified by new Modification time 2008 11 25 11 13 33 Field Old value New value Type Ares Bar Back Figure 9 28 Viewing the Audit Trail StarQuality User Manual General Setting Options User Administration Admin only 9 8 User Administration Admin only The administrator user can manage the list of users and their permissions and add new users to the system Every administrator has the right to modify normal users while only the admin user can modify administrators Restricted administrators cannot modify a user except if it was created by themselves No user can delete the admin user 9 8 1 Registering Modifying Users gt To add or modify users 1 From the Settings menu select User The browser displays a list of user administration tasks The Users tab displays a list of existing users I Browser User 4 et 01 User admin are E 02 User rights User administration 03 Password add new Name Login Admin Can modify his her
129. cted 64 bit Oracle QUESTION StarQuality INFO INFO opt starquality INFO INFO Environment INFO Searching for running S INFO Oracle checking INFO UES UES UES UES UES Q O O O O OO Fl RROR QUEST C INFO INFO INFO BWANM INFO INFO ION ION ION ION ION ONF IRM ION ONF IRM S Detected Solaris_x86 with 64 bit Oracle Oracle host Oracle port string instead of TNS names name localhost 172213 Oracle service name BWANMS Oracle SID Oracle SYST BWANMS Confirm the EM user password password Password mismatch Oracle SYST Confirm the EM user password password Attempting to tnsping localhost 1721 Successful tarQuality modules so using full connect Attempting to login to Oracle with the SYSTEM user and the SID Successful Attempting to login to Oracle with the SYSTEM user and the service name BWANMS User Manual Installation Installing StarQuality INFO Successful INFO Oracle checking successful INFO Configuring user SSH parameters INFO Done 2 7 2 4 StarQuality Installation Prompts The application prompts for the following E Operating system user name to be created E Operating system group to be created E Directory below the opt directory to be used by StarQuality D Profile file to be used HM Type of StarQuality installation
130. ctivating the SMTP server see Northbound Interface NBI on page 266 E SNMP Trap Address es and port s to where the application should send an SNMP trap if there is a threshold violation Zero or more e mail addresses can be given separated by commas The format of the individual addresses communityQ computer namef port If you do not set an explicit community public is used by default If you do not set an explicit port it is 162 by default The system also sends the variable causing the violation in the SNMP trap but only if there is only one variable in the threshold definition and its current value can be stored in 32 bits A prerequisite for the actual trap sending is network connection on the chosen port between the StarQuality server and the trap receiving application machine E Command Not applicable E Continuous alert If selected at each violation the appropriate e mail and or SNMP trap is sent If not selected this will be done only if there was no violation during the previous measurement In both cases the system will send an e mail and or SNMP trap when the threshold violation is ended E When Which time period template is used for the threshold The possible options are set in Settings gt Templates gt Exclusion Window Templates 4 Specify the threshold attributes in the Expression section The threshold syntax contains 4 parts separated by a key That is lt value VARx gt lt comparators gt
131. ctor load StarQuality 02 Device and measurement summary Server configuration Name SOAP Server group Oracle Oracle Type ko Other soar zl Host localhost Login administrator Pwd dmin123 Directory opt starqualityf Cancel Figure 2 67 Configuring SOAP Server 3 Fill in the following fields HM Name free text User Manual Installation Configuration Parameters E Type Select Other gt SOAP E Host Login Password and Directory copy the values from the Scheduled Reports sever 4 Goto Start Stop Status The SOAP entry it is red Click Start to activate the new server Verify it turns green Server start stop status 17 items found check all 05 Start Stop Status stop all Name Status Type Server group Host Login Directory Parami Param2 events 07 Ci Figure 2 68 Server Start Stop Status SOAP Entry 2 9 5 Configuration Parameters HM The new 4Motion measurements which do not have values for the ver 2 5M devices can be hidden under the Measurement menu E There is an option to keep every XML file for one week in the opt starquality tmp xml archive directory Contact Alvarion s customer service for more information StarQuality User Manual Installation 2 10 2 10 1 StarQuality StarQuality Upgrade StarQuality Upgrade The upgrade has to be performed by an administrator user Upgrade is availabl
132. d Partitioning table E Name and password for its Oracle user QUES INFO INFO INFO QUES QUES INFO INFO ION ION ION ION ION Checking Oracle schema Getting the default tablespace directory StarQuality Conf tablespace name SQ_CONF StarQuality Conf tablespace file C ORACLE PRODUCT 10 2 0 ORADATA ORCL SQ_CONF dbf StarQuality Conf tablespace size 300M Creating the tablespace SQ_CONF this could take several minutes Oracle tablespace SQ_CONF created StarQuality Data tablespace name SQ_DATA StarQuality Data tablespace file C ORACLE PRODUCT 10 2 0 ORADATA ORCL SQ_DATA dbf StarQuality Data tablespace size 10000M Creating the tablespace SQ_DATA this could take several minutes Creating the tablespace SQ_DATA this could take several minutes Oracle tablespace SQ_DATA created StarQuality Oracle user name SQ StarQuality Oracle user password Creating the Oracle schema this could take several minutes Oracle user SQ created Finishing the Installation 1 The installer generates the schematic maps and exits INFO Redrawing schematic maps User Manual Installation INFO Installer ended bash 3 00 Installing StarQuality 2 To load a licence and run StarQuality refer to Loading a StarQuality Licence on page 93 Running StarQuality on Solaris on page 92
133. d earlier too As a hint the current time interval is indicated in green with the number of measurements running with that interval If you select a different interval the Statistics page is automatically displayed 3 Click the view link in the first column A page identical to the one displayed from Settings gt Measurements gt Summary is displayed filtered by the selected measurement server StarQuality 256 User Manual General Setting Options Collector Load b Browser Servers 4 l ojx 01 Licences s 02 Device and measurement summary Summary table for all equipments KEE Site name Equipment IP address FHCA Sum 04 Server configuration name 05 Start Stop Status P j An Fr view SERVER HEALTH 172 30 105 210 172 30 105 210 16162 32 37 07 Collector load view SERVER HEALTH A 2 172 30 105 210 16162 37 37 Rebeet Number of measurements 0007474 Summary ms 2 Number of measurements per equipments sert 0004 4 Figure 9 24 Collector Load Statistics 4 You can view the list of measurements that were unsuccessful at a given time by clicking on the view link The list of devices and measurements are displayed together with another link that opens to the configuration panel of the device ER EEE Servers 4 l op Status load Collector load Back The measurements below were not successful at the given time Parent name Name view Jaga Agent Nvswi Availabilty view Jaga Agent Nvswi RTT view Jag
134. d firewall port StarQuality Chart Server TCP 4444 Checking Oracle parameters Output folder C starquality opt starquality lib No value is set for Oracle TNS Completed a Figure 2 55 StarQuality Basic Installation Complete password for the same user 6 Click Next The StarQuality Service Registration window is displayed Fill in and confirm the required password It is recommended to use the Windows User Manual Installation Installing StarQuality M starQuality Setup Dis xi StarQuality Service registration The service will run as Administrator with the given password ServiceLogin Administrator Password Confirm password Nullsoft Install System v2 37 Cancel Figure 2 56 StarQuality Windows Service Registration 7 Click Next The Oracle Connection page is displayed Figure 2 19 E StarQuality Setup TET Oracle connection Please fill in the Oracle connection parameters Oracle home c Oraclelproduct 10 2 0 db 1 SS TNS sq Host and port localhost fisz Service name fig tits ap so System password Iesse Confirm password forsere Malsor Instal System v2 42 mo Cancel Figure 2 57 Oracle Connection Parameters 8 Verify that the correct values are filled in the following fields StarQuality User Manual Installation Installing StarQuality E Oracle Home Path to the Oracle Client Home variable on the StarQuality machine E
135. dd firewall port StarQuality Chart Server TCP 4444 Checking Oracle parameters Output folder C starquality opt starquality lib No value is set for Oracle TNS Completed a Nullsoft Install System v2 37 Figure 2 14 StarQuality Basic Installation Complete 7 Click Next the installer prompts for the Oracle installation and patch located on the StarQuality DVD Figure 2 15 Proceed as follows StarQuality User Manual Installation Installing StarQuality a Select the Oracle installer folder If required click Browse and select the location for the files M starQuality Setup Mile x Oracle Database install Please select Oracle installer folder Oracle 10 2 0 1 32bit setup for XP and 10 2 0 4 patch required Installer folder 10201 database win32 databasefsetup exe p6810189 10204 Win32 diski setup exe C Documents and Settings AdministratoriDesktop db Browse i installer Folder Nullsoft Install System v2 42 lt Back Cancel Figure 2 15 Oracle Database Install b Click Next The StarQuality Installation window is displayed Figure 2 16 Click Browse to change the default Oracle home directory IMPORTANT H The Oracle home directory must be on the same disk drive as the StarQuality Cygwin home directory StarQuality User Manual Installation Installing StarQuality M starqQuality Setup StarQuality installation Oracle Database instal
136. displays the Setup wizard and completes the installation Biel ks M StarQuality Setup Completing the StarQuality Setup Wizard StarQuality has been installed on your computer Click Finish to close this wizard Figure 2 60 StarQuality Setup Wizard Completing Installation 12 Click Finish to close the wizard StarQuality User Manual Installation Installing StarQuality 13 To load a licence and run StarQuality refer to Loading a StarQuality Licence on page 93 Running StarQuality on Windows on page 90 StarQuality O User Manual Installation K HR 25 101 StarQuality Installing StarQuality on Solaris Server with Internal Oracle Database Installing StarQuality on Solaris Server with Internal Oracle Database Before beginning the StarQuality installation refer to Table 2 1 to ensure that this is the correct installation for your system Check that you have performed all the tasks outlined in Section 2 5 1 below This installation type involves configuration of the Solaris kernel parameters and then installation of StarQuality Pre installation Tasks Disk Partitioning For medium network configurations containing no more than 350 BTSs or 50 000 CPEs disk partitioning is recommended as described in the following table Table 2 8 Disk Partitioning Physical Disk Volume Setup Physical disk 1 Volume 1 OS StarQuality SW Oracle SW Physical disk 2 Volum
137. dmin privileges or you have specific versa on read needs Read more about file modes lt Back Cancel Figure 2 25 Select Root Install Directory 6 Choose settings as recommended on screen Verify that Root directory is a local drive Click Next Cygwin Setup Select Local Package Directory ofi xi Select Local Package Directory E Select directory where you want Setup to store the installation files it downloads The directory will be created if it does not already exist M Local Package Directory C TEMPSCyqwinFrom wwG oh4Com CyqwinFromywwG oh4Con Browse lt Back Cancel Figure 2 26 Select Local Package Directory StarQuality User Manual Installation Pre installation Tasks 7 Verify that Local Package Directory is the correct path Click Next The Select Packages window is displayed Cygwin Setup Select Packages Me x Select Packages Select packages to install C Keep Prev View Category All Default E All Default entry Admin Default DI Audio Default E Base 4 Default Database 4 Default E Devel Default Doc 6 Default Editors 4 Default Gnome 4 Default vw Hide obsolete packages lt Back Cancel Figure 2 27 Select Packages Window All Default Initial State 8 Click on the word Default in the main All entry package see Figure 2 6 to change it to Install Cygwin
138. dow Perl Version 12 Click Next the installation proceeds until completed StarQuality User Manual Installation Pre installation Tasks 47 Cygwin Setup oix Progress i This page displays the progress of the download or installation Installing libdb4 5 4 5 20 2 2 ust bin cygbz2 1 d Progress Total Disk Es Figure 2 30 Cygwin Installation Process 13 Click Finish Cygwin Setup Installation Status and Create Icons B lsl x Create Icons Tell setup if you want it to create a few icons for convenient access to the ze Cygwin environment IV Create icon on Desktop IV Add icon to Start Menu Installation Status Installation Complete Figure 2 31 Cygwin Installation Completion StarQuality User Manual Installation gt FAG e 2 3 2 1 StarQuality Installing StarQuality To download and install Cygwin from the Internet Make sure the Cygwin version you download and use includes the following packages Sapache bash coreutils cygutils expat gcc core gcc mingw g less libexpat1 libiconv2 libncurses8 libreadline6 make openssh ping termcap tzcode which Installing StarQuality Overview base files binutils crypt cygwin findutils gcc g grep libbz2 1 libexpat1 devel libintl3 libpere0 libwrapO mingw runtime openssl sed terminfo vim zlib base passwd bzip2 cygrunsrv editrights gawk gcc mingw core gzip libdb4
139. e in case StarQuality and Oracle are on the same machine Oracle server TNS in case StarQuality and Oracle are on separate machines Oracle client TNS TNS name is defined in the file tnsnames ora placed in the directory ORACLE HOMENNETWORK VADMIN Password of Oracle SYSTEM user 2 From Settings select Site and Equipment Configuration 3 Click the Server Health icon to enter its site 4 From the Creation drop down menu select Add Equipment from Template 5 Select the template upon which to base the equipment setup Default Oracle 6 Click OK A basic setup template page is displayed StarQuality User Manual Network Discovery StarQuality Discovery of Equipment under a Server Health Site Template name Default Oracle Equipment name Equipment description Connection User system Password Right Normal sl Timeout sec Retries Default measurement is min amp interval Choose an icon icon equip png EI Timeout sec Configured Add immediately to job queue OK Cancel Figure 4 8 Default Oracle Template Fill in the required information for parameter information and description refer to Discovery of WiMAX Devices on page 125 Name and description free text Connection lt TNS name gt User system Password SYSTEM password Right SYSDBA SYSOPER Normal according to security preferences Leave all other fields
140. e displayed with the only difference that the name of the previously selected object in the object field cannot be changed To initiate chart editing 1 Access the Chart Configuration page Figure 9 13 using one of the following methods Select Settings gt Customization gt Public charts or Private charts submenu items Select Settings gt Site and Equipment Configuration when a non virtual site or equipment is selected in the hierarchy This case differs from a menu based direct access in the following points Itis not necessary to specify the site and equipment name filter conditions when creating a new chart because the results are filtered automatically for the object at which the user started editing the chart There is a back link on the starting page which leads back to the appropriate site or equipment Similarly to the Site and equipment configuration both the location in the site equipment hierarchy as well as a pull down menu with the usual operations appear on the top of the page Ifthe chart template configuration is opened from the equipment page then for the template based creation of new charts the system automatically offers the names of the equipment and template together for chart name However in the other case only the template name will User Manual General Setting Options Configuring Public and Private Charts StarQuality be offered which in general will not be unique in
141. e sampled period Burst Error Rate Ratio Downlink Succeeded Transfer Ratio Drop Ratio Repetition Ratio Ratio is based on number of bursts counted in the sampled period StarQuality User Manual Device Specific Information Key Performance Indicators KPIs Table 11 16 Traffic Counters 4Motion Ver 3 0 Continued Counter Members Description Burst Error Rate Ratio Uplink Succeeded Transfer Ratio Drop Ratio Repetition Ratio Ratio is based on number of bursts counted in the sampled period Burst Error Rate Uplink count Succeeded transfer Qty Dropped Qty Repetitions Counts the actual numbers of bursts in the sampled period MAP Size Distribution Frames 2 Symbols 4 Symbols 6 Symbols 8 Symbols 10 Symbols gt 10 Symbols Number of frames per number of symbols per BS for the downlink direction MCS Distribution Downlink Bits per Second MCS Distribution Uplink Bits per Second 19 MCS values from QPSK 1 2 rep 6 To 64 QAM 1 2 MIMO B Throughput of each MCS for the uplink and downlink directions MS Hand Over Count Succeeded HO Attempts Failed HO Attempts Counts number handover attempts both in and out Hand Over Ratio Succeeded Attempts Ratio HO Attempts Ratio Failed Attempts Ratio Ratio calculation of counters mentioned above MS Registration Count Created Service Flow Qty Failed I
142. e 2 RAID 0 Oracle tablespaces redo logs etc entire SID Physical disk 3 Physical disk 4 For large network configurations containing no more than 1000 BTSs or 250 000 CPEs disk partitioning is recommended as described in the following table Note that the HDDs have a capacity of 500 GB User Manual Installation Pre installation Tasks Table 2 9 Disk Partitioning Physical Disk Volume Setup Physical disk 1 Volume 1 OS StarQuality SW Oracle SW Physical disk 2 Volume 2 RAID 0 Oracle tablespaces redo logs etc entire SID Physical disk 3 Physical disk 4 Physical disk 5 Physical disk 6 Physical disk 7 Physical disk 8 Physical disk 9 Physical disk 10 2 5 1 2 Configuring Kernel Parameters for Solaris x86 1 Add the following entries to the etc system file and reboot the system set shmsys shminfo_shmmax 42 94967295 set shmsys shminfo_shmmni 100 set semsys seminfo_semmni 100 set semsys seminfo semmsl 256 2 Verify a minimum of 10 GB swap space 2 5 1 3 Configuring Network Ports The following ports must be open between the server machine client machine managed network equipment and other NMS OSS elements StarQuality User Manual Installation Installing StarQuality Table 2 10 Network Ports Use Port Protocol Direction App server and managed 161 SNMP Outbound towards NE equipment App server m
143. e 2 42 Figure 2 43 Figure 2 44 Figure 2 45 Figure 2 46 Figure 2 47 Figure 2 48 Figure 2 49 Figure 2 50 Figure 2 51 Figure 2 52 Figure 2 53 Figure 2 54 Figure 2 55 Figure 2 56 Figure 2 57 StarQuality Select Packages Window All Insta 35 Select Packages Window Perl Version 36 Cygwin Installation e 37 Cygwin Installation GCOMmplatlonsicscsisaniaicecsssciaviestepatieiva date Ee SEENEN 37 StarQuality Setup Wizard Wimdow nrnna 39 Licence Agreement ee Ee EE Een A0 Choose Components vasstessersrvemseemkereasseaaermundue 40 StarQuality Installing E 41 StarQuality Basic Installation CGomplete A 41 StarQuality Windows Service Registration rrrnrrnnnnnnnrrnnnonnnrnnnnrnnnrnnnnnnrrnnnnrnnnnne 42 Oracle Connection P r m iers Luussnusnamnnemnmenndvekummeldkednnnmnniidv 42 Oracle Connection Tablespace Parameiers EEN 44 Oracle Connection User Parameter 44 StarQuality Setup Wizard Completing Installation nessonneneennen eenn eeeeeerrssrer neee 45 Cygwin Net Release Setup Program Window rrrrvnnnnnnvrnnnnnnnvvnnnnnnnrnnnrnrrrrnnnnennnnne 49 Choose a Download Source Window rrrnnnnvnnnnnnvrrnnnnnnvrnnnnnnnvnnnernnnrnnnrrrnrrnensnnnnnne 49 Select Root Install Director 50 Select Local Package Directory EEN 50 Select Packages Window All Default Initial Gate 51 Select Packages Window All Insta 51 Select Packages Window Perl Version 52 Cygwin Installation Process Laavsaqaqm
144. e between immediate adjacent versions only Stop the StarQuality service and processes prior to upgrade IMPORTANT If you are running an upgrade the installer may not keep the StarQuality files or existing collected data Therefore prior to upgrade make sure to check the Release Notes for version specific information StarQuality Upgrade on Windows To upgrade StarQuality Windows 1 Perform Stop Services as follows a On the desktop right click My Computer and select Manage b Select Services and Applications gt Services c Right click on StarQuality Service and select Stop 2 Run the installation program starquality exe The installation wizard is displayed 3 Follow the installtion instructions on the screen The wizard runs as in the regular installation procedure until it reaches the StarQuality Schema Update window which indicates that this is an upgrade Click Next User Manual Installation StarQuality Upgrade on Windows M starQuality Setup oix StarQuality schema update The StarQuality schema needs to be updated Click on the Next button to run the update Result of the update script checking Update scripts are needed update 20090105 sq update 20090130 sq update 20090211 sq update 20090223 wimax sql update 20090325 sq Nullsoft Install System v2 42 Figure 2 69 StarQuality Schema Update Window M starquality Setup x A Running the update scripts this could take se
145. e complex search system accessed from the Search menu item and the simple filter system used in other places For the Search menu item the StarQuality application performs character based case insensitive whole text matching Four special characters can be used in the search string E _ underline or question mark matches an arbitrary character E percentage or asterisk matches zero or more arbitrary characters Therefore for example the _apple search string results in all names whose second to sixth characters are apple regardless of case followed by an arbitrary string of characters that is for example Xapple123 aApPle lAppleTree etc In other cases filtering charts editing etc the StarQuality distinguishes small and capital letters but the and characters do not have the special meaning mentioned above In order to search for text that includes a space include the space in the string for search For example lt space gt SU will result in all names including SU with a space proceeding it For more information refer to Search Admin only on page 221 in Chapter 9 Search is relevant to names of sites equipment etc but not to IPs You can use the Measurements gt Search menu item for displaying actual measurements After searching use the view link next to the equipment to view the measurement charts To start searching for a meas
146. e following order equipment name equipment description optional and IP address Allowed delimiters semicolon or tab Save it as a txt type file b In the StarQuality application click Browse to select this file c Click OK the system returns to the main network list loaded with device data from the uploaded file You can edit this list as required 10 Click OK the system searches and discovers each existing and online BTS For each discovered BTS a success message appears For each unsuccessful discovery an error massage is displayed and the system continues to the next device 11 When the discovery is complete click Back to return to the network site 12 Verify that all the equipments are not colored red which means that their data is being collected 13 Verify that for each BTS a matching site has been created named as the BTS with the postfix SUs i e lt btsname SUs gt 14 Incase of BTS SNMP collection FDD 3 5 3 6 or BreezeACCESS VL this SU site is colored red which means that no SU under it are being collected yet In this case activate Data Collection for up to 10 SUs as described in Section 4 2 1 below StarQuality er User Manual Network Di scovery Activation Deactivation of Data Collection 4 2 1 Activation Deactivation of Data Collection When you create a site data collection is by default activated for all AUs and SUs except for SNMP FDD ver3 5 3 6 and BreezeACCESS VL SUs To
147. e measurements which cannot be moved to another piece of equipment Virtual Objects In the StarQuality system the administrator and the restricted administrator users can create sites equipments and measurements These items are immediately available for authorized users too they appear under for example the Measurements menu item where the individual elements are displayed in the User Manual General Setting Options Object Hierarchy Overview same division and in the same way as the administrators have specified during creation This initial hierarchy and its objects are called basic or normal objects Parallel to this structure both administrators and normal users can develop their own structures moreover administrators can create public structures as well Each level of the basic hierarchy has its parallel equivalent HM Virtual site corresponds to a site object can be placed under any basic or virtual site and can contain virtual sites virtual equipment and linked basic equipments E Virtual equipment corresponds to an equipment object can be placed under any basic or virtual site and can contain measurements and private public charts E Private public charts correspond to the measurement object in contrast to that however it can contain not only one or two measurement values but also arbitrary measurements and report summaries of an arbitrary piece of equipment It can be placed under virtual equipments manually
148. e parameters Installer started LOG file tmp starquality install log Checking perl ve i Checking OS type OS Solaris x86 Checking perl 32 64bit Checking perl PerllO Perl was built with PerllO Checking perl threading Perl threading disabled Checking required packages Package SUNWapchr found Package SUNWapchu found Package SUNWbash found Package SUNWggrp found Package SUNWgtar found Package SUNWgzip found Package SUNWlexpt found Package SUNWsshcu found Package Package hdu found Package hr found Package hu found Done Checking required packages for the schematic map feature Package SUNWpng found Package SUNWzlib found Done Extracting files into the temp directory tmp starquality Done Licence information This program contains free of charge third party Java and Perl libraries The detailed list of components the detai be found in the third party directory on the installer CD By answering Y you acknowledge that your use of these software is governed by the terms of the respective program li 2 5 2 2 2 5 2 3 StarQuality Figure 2 61 Installation on Solaris Basic Checks License Information When the basic checks are complete the license agreement is displayed To scroll down the agreement press either the spacebar or the Enter key Read the agreement carefully before accepting Installing Embedded Oracle Database The applic
149. e uplink downlink RSSI Received Signal Strength Indicator SNR Signal to Noise Ration and modulation rate from rate 1 BPSK 1 2 to rate 8 64QAM 3 4 measurements for all SUs Note the following regarding FDD ver3 5 3 6 SUs SNMP based data collection E The number of SUs is limited to 10 per BTS E Only a single value per each counter is displayed according to its value at the time of sampling StarQuality User Manual Device Specific Information Codes for Threshold Setting Table 11 3 FDD TDD Performance Counters File Collection Counter Description Uplink RSSI Average Max Min dBm The average maximum minimum RSSI value of the signal from the SU measured at the AU FDD Micro Base Station for the past 15 minutes In TDD there is only Average Downlink RSSI Average Max Min dBm The average maximum minimum RSSI value of the signal from the AU measured at the SU and reported over the air to the Base Station equipment for the past 15 minutes In TDD there is only Average Uplink SNR Average Max Min dB The average maximum minimum SNR value of the signal from the SU measured at the AU FDD Micro Base Station for the past 15 minutes Downlink SNR Average Max Min dB The Average maximum minimum SNR value of the signal from the AU measured at the SU and reported over the air to the Base Station equipment for the past 15 minutes Uplink Rate Average Max Min From rate 1
150. e with an active SMTP server as described in Mail Server Configuration on page 95 Step 2 To set an e mail address 1 From Settings gt Customization select E mail Addresses A list of addresses appears 2 Click add new The E mail Address Configuration window is displayed User Manual General Setting Options Setting E mail Addresses Admin only E mail address configuration Name E mail Bulk threshold e mail sending a OK Cancel Figure 9 14 E mail Address Configuration 3 Specify the following Name It must be unique for each user This name will appear in the selection list for in the Thresholds Configuration window E mail The e mail address to where the messages should be sent Multiple threshold violations in one mail In case of a single sampling interval in which multiple threshold violations occurred it is possible to send the notification in a single e mail bulk instead of sending them separately The bulk mail is less detailed than the separate e mail From StarQuality css xp01 mailto StarQuality css xp01 Sent Sunday May 24 2009 3 32 PM To User Subject StarQuality Throughput lt 2 mbps Major Violated threshold Throughput lt 2 mbps Type Level Major Time 2009 05 24 15 30 00 Measurement values Site name Equipment name Measurement name First value Second value FDD TFTP 10 10 184 1 Slot 3 Throughput 641797 76 365210 56 Figure 9 15 Example of Se
151. ed Total VFRT StarQuality al User Manual Device Specific Information Codes for Threshold Setting Table 11 8 Syntax for BreezeACCESS VL AU Measurements Continued Description Parameter Frames Submitted High VFSH Frames Submitted Low VFSL Frames Submitted Mid VFSM Frames Submitted Total VFST Wireless Frames Received VWFR Wireless Frames Submitted Beacons VWFB Wireless Frames Submitted OtherMng and Data VWFO Wireless Frames Submitted Total VWFT CIR Allocated VCA Ethernet Throughput VETH MIR Allocated VMA Noise Floor VNF Number Of Connected SUs VCS Retransmission VR Throughput VTHR Uptime VUPT RSSI VRSS Table 11 9 Syntax for BreezeACCESS VL SU Measurements Description Parameter Concatenated Frames Single VCFS Concatenated Frames Double VCFD Concatenated Frames More VCFM Concatenated Frames Total VCFT Errors Receive CRC VERC Errors Receive Decrypt VERD Errors Receive Duplicate frames discarded VERd Errors Receive Other VERo Errors Receive Overrun VERO Errors Receive Phy VERP Errors Transmit Frames dropped too many retries VETD StarQuality User Manual Device Specific Information LAS StarQuality Default Built in Reports Table 11 9 Syntax for BreezeACCESS VL SU Measurements Continued Description Parameter Errors Transmit In
152. ed If it is set for each chart a Help sign appears for the users when the chart is viewed and when clicking this link the page pointed by the given URL is displayed in a new window NOTE The editing and creating of these pages are not part of the StarQuality system 2 If you have administrator and restricted administrator user permissions in addition to the above fields you can change whether the chart is public or private Under the members link is the list of chart elements of the current chart The items of this table are the following in order User Manual General Setting Options Configuring Public and Private Charts StarQuality Editing links add new creating a new element edit modifying an element del deleting an element Order The order of the element within the chart The order not only determines the drawing order of the elements on the chart but it also influences the reference point of the chart base The order can be modified on this starting page with the green down and up arrows Name The name of the element which appears in the table of values on the chart Object The object for which the element contain data For chart elements the object can be a basic site or basic equipment report For measurement chart elements it can be an interface or other measurement Threshold or report variable Depending on the type of the element report or measurement it contains the name of
153. eeteeiceaustderedaswlaaeigiaremeenant de 186 Table 7 3 Alarms View Options messene Seed sakene 187 StarQuality User Manual Tables Table 7 4 Filtering REN 190 Table 8 1 Navigating Reparere ammende 207 Table 9 1 Admin Registering Options rrrerannvrnnrnnnnrrnnnonvrrrnnnnnnvrnnnnnnnnnnnenrrrrnnenennrnnnnrnnnennerennn 262 Table 11 1 BTS Configuration Requirements ku 275 Table 11 2 FDD and TDD Traffic BGkbis AE 276 Table 11 3 FDD TDD Performance Counters File Collection rrrrrnnrrnrrrnnnnnnnrnnnrrnnrnnnnrennr 278 Table 11 4 Syntax for TDD FDD AU Measurements rrnnnnrvvvvvennrrnnnrrrnnnnnrrrrrrrrnnnrnnnrererrrnnnnnn 278 Table 11 5 Syntax for TDD FDD SU Measurements rrnnnnnnvvvvnrnrrnnnrrrnnnnnrrrrrrrrnnnrnnererrrrrnnnnnn 279 Table 11 6 BreezeACCESS VL Traffic Counters 280 Table 11 7 BreezeACCESS VL Performance Counters rrrrnvrnnnrnrnrrnnnrrnrrrnnnnnnnrnnnrrnnrrnnerennr 282 Table 11 8 Syntax for BreezeACCESS VL AU Meaeurements 284 Table 11 9 Syntax for BreezeACCESS VL SU Meaeurements 285 Table 11 10 Traffic Counters 4Motion Ver 2 287 Table 11 11 Common Measurements for 4Motion BI 289 Table 11 12 Performance Counters Per M 289 Table 11 13 Syntax for 4Motion BS Measurements 290 Table 11 14 Syntax for 4Motion Common Meaeurements ne 292 Table 11 15 Syntax for 4Motion SU Measurement rrnnnnnvnvevvrrnrrnnnrrrrnnnnrrrrrrrnnnnrnnrrerrrrennnnnn 292 Table 11 16 Traffic Counters 4Motion V
154. elevant system Files without having to reboot your computer Click Next to continue cael Figure 2 32 StarQuality Setup Wizard Window 4 Click Next the wizard displays a license agreement Please read the agreement carefully StarQuality User Manual Installation Installing StarQuality isi Es License Agreement Please review the license terms before installing StarQuality Press Page Down to see the rest of the agreement This program contains free of charge third party Java Perl and NSIS software libraries as well a Cygwin running environment The detailed list of components the detailed license files and sources can be Found in the third party directory on the installer CD By clicking I Agree you acknowledge that your use of these software is governed by the terms of the respective program licenses SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT the Agreement READ CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THE SOFTWARE vi If you accept the terms of the agreement click I Agree to continue You must accept the agreement to install StarQuality Nullsoft Install System v2 42 lt Back Cancel Figure 2 33 Licence Agreement 5 Click Next the wizard displays components to install M StarQuality Setup Mile x Choose Components Choose which features of StarQuality you want to install Check the components you want to install and uncheck the components you don t want to install Click Next to continue
155. er 20 293 Table 11 17 NPU ee 297 Table 11 18 MS Counters d ses h eeeteegeE Ne geredegd eege gege aatpeceuassedensdeccnecadasecepenassbenentiss 300 Table 11 19 4Motion BS Threshold Codes rrrnnnnnvrrnnnnnnnvnnnnnnrrnnnernrrrnnnnnnnnnnernnnnennrrrrrrnnerennnn 301 Table 11 20 NPU Threshold Codes Au 305 Table 11 21 SU Threshold Codes urrrnnennannnnnnnennannennnnnnnennnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnennnnennnnnnannnnnnnnnnenennnnnn 305 Table 11 22 Traffic Counters BreezeMAX Evireme 307 Table 123 BFS FPS riisiin aae a eea eaa adea e EAER A SEAE RELEET Rane EiT ENERSEN 309 StarQuality User Manual Tables Tablo 11 24 SUKP ae 309 Table 11 25 BTS God s runner ansvar A EAA AAAA A EAE ETON 311 RIESCH Keele EN 311 StarQuality User Manual Figures Figure 2 1 Figure 2 2 Figure 2 3 Figure 2 4 Figure 2 5 Figure 2 6 Figure 2 7 Figure 2 8 Figure 2 9 Figure 2 10 Figure 2 11 Figure 2 12 Figure 2 13 Figure 2 14 Figure 2 15 Figure 2 16 Figure 2 17 Figure 2 18 Figure 2 19 Figure 2 20 Figure 2 21 Figure 2 22 Figure 2 23 Figure 2 24 Figure 2 25 Figure 2 26 Figure 2 27 StarQuality Figures Cygwin Net Release Setup Program window rrnnnrrnnnnvnrrrnnnonnvrnnnnnnnrnnnrennrrnnnernnnnee 15 Choose a Download Source Window rrrrnnnnvvrnnnnnnnvnnnrvnrrrnnnrrnvrnnnernnnennrennrrnnnsrennnn 15 Select Root Install Directory 2umeemuisammnmeneient ajour 16 Select Local Package Directory uasermsamvumusamsek
156. eria All categories are optional which means if left empty no filtering is performed Also all input is according to the search rules described in On Searching in General on page 158 Site name BTS name BTS Address IP Site ID as exists in the database 7 Click OK a list of network elements matching the filter criteria is displayed see Figure 8 17 You can repeat the filtering until getting the desired results 8 Select the check boxes of BTSs you wish to export data from or use the topmost check box to select all the BTSs 9 Click Sector Selection in the selection path see Figure 8 16 A list of all the sectors belonging to the BTSs chosen in Step 8 is displayed 10 Click SU Selection in the selection path A list of all the SUs belonging to the sectors chosen in Step 9 is displayed StarQuality User Manual Reports Bulk Export Wizard Exporting Data to XLS Files Bulk export wizard 4 Basic parameters gt BTS selection gt Sector selection gt SU selection gt Export UR SIE Ru M Site name BTS name A BTS address Site ID BSR F MAC zx Vv 4Motion 10 10 184 43 10 10 184 43 2500 85 9 9 9 00 10 7 62 1E 96 Vv 4Motion 10 10 184 43 10 10 184 43 2500 BS 9 9 9 00 10 E7 62 39 5D Vv 4Motion 10 10 184 43 10 10 184 43 2500 BS 9 9 9 00 12 CF 98 6F 2F Vv 4Motion 10 10 184 43 10 10 184 43 2500 BS 9 9 9 00 12 CF C3 DA 6A Vv 4Motion 10 10 184 43 10
157. ername and password fill them in the SMTP_AUTH clause and delete the hash sign from its line beginning PVSR EMAIL ADDRESS this address will be used as the sender for outgoing e mail messages If it is not specified it is automatically set to StarQuality lt hostname gt while if the specified value does not contain the sign then the lt specified value gt lt hostname gt is used SMTP AUTH in cases of SMTP server which requires username and password delete the sign and add the username and password in lt user pwd gt format 3 Configure the server to send e mail notifications about admin events SADMIN_EMATL_ADDRESSES ADMIN EMAIL ADDRESSES a list of e mail addresses separated by commas to which the system sends e mails regarding administrative information for example server up or down 2 9 3 Command Line Installer General Information 2 9 3 1 Input Parameters The application has several input options E n or help displays the different input options E c or compatible displays the different operating system Oracle versions supported by the installer StarQuality User Manual Installation 2 9 3 2 2 9 3 3 StarQuality Command Line Installer General Information E d or debug the installer application displays different log messages The DEBUG level logging can be turned on using this option The DEBUG messages appear in the log file tmp pvsr install log even if
158. ervice flows Uptime hours NPU uptime Time of system up User Manual StarQuality Device Specific Information Key Performance Indicators KPIs 11 5 3 3 MS KPIs Table 11 18 MS Counters Counter Members Description MCS Downlink Min Max Average Counts bit bin for each MS transaction Min Bit Bin and max are calculated by BS Average is calculated by dividing by number of samples MCS Uplink Bit Bin Min Max Average Counts bit bin for each MS transaction Min and max are calculated by BS Average is calculated by dividing by number of samples MS Burst Error Rate Downlink Count Succeeded transferred Qty Dropped Bursts Qty Repetitions Counts HARQ bursts of ACK dropped and total MS Burst Error Rate Ratio Downlink Succeeded Transfer Ratio Drop Ratio Repetition Ratio Ratio based on above counters Burst Error Rate Ratio Uplink Succeeded Transfer Ratio Drop Ratio Repetition Ratio Counts HARQ bursts of ACK dropped and total MS Burst Error Rate Uplink Count Succeeded transferred Qty Dropped Bursts Qty Ratio based on above counters Bursts Bits per Second Repetitions RSSI Uplink dBm Min Max Average RSSI is sampled from each burst Min and max are calculated by BS Average is calculated by dividing by number of samples Aggregated Uplink Counts the bytes transferred and calculates Throughput Bits per Downlink the transferred rate normal
159. ext parameter a Refer to User Types and Their Settings on page 6 for more information Can modify own settings The user can only modify their password preferences own virtual hierarchy and charts if this field is checked For administrator and restricted administrator users this is always set automatically User Permissions Rights Overview For normal users the access rights can be changed in four different levels E Site equipment measurement These three objects are in a tree hierarchy in which you can choose the items that the user can view If you appoint one of these objects then all objects below it can also be accessed by the user For example if the user has the access rights to the ROOT item zero level site all the objects in the system are accessible If the user has access rights to one site then all sites equipment and measurements below it are accessible however if access rights are provided only for the equipment then 262 User Manual General Setting Options User Permissions Rights 9 8 2 2 StarQuality only that equipment and its measurements are accessible access right to the measurement only makes only that measurement accessible Note that the rights are given only for the base hierarchy and not for a virtual site equipment or public chart since the system calculates the permissions for these from the corresponding base objects E Chart For each individual cha
160. f there are fewer licences available than required for operating the system or any of the 247 User Manual General Setting Options Licences StarQuality licenses has expired then users receive a warning message during the login process Licence data can only uploaded and deleted but not edited The individual columns are E Editing links add new adding a new licence file del deleting a licence entry Name Name of the licence End date Expiration date of the given licence If it is unlimited then use never Quantity Quantity of licences in the system Can be unlimited Needed Quantity required to operate the system Error type In those rows where the licence is invalid an error message is shown and the row is displayed in red Possible error messages Wrong checksum invalid line since someone directly modified the licence entry Expired licence was valid for a limited period only which has expired No licence found the given licence entry is required but not found Low licence quantity the quantity of the given licence is not enough for the system A licence can be added by providing a licence file During this process the application keeps the already existing licence entries or modifies them if they exist in the file To add a new licence Place the licence file on the computer from which you activated the client 2 From Settings select Servers the Servers tab is displa
161. figuration acco te i ee ee 196 821 Regular Geen EE 196 8 2 2 On Demand ME eer 202 8 3 VIEWING Reports sisisasesnecserestanncate sactssnntansaatenesiicanecnenastienaannestanemidesseiessninanaenannnaciniens 207 831 Navigating Report VIEWS iiicicccecnnsssccizetesccsmcaasncteesausd tuntenieseeneesdaccanaieeeewnisancteve 207 8 3 2 Setting the Report Range and Display AEN 207 8 4 Bulk Export Wizard Exporting Data to XLS Files rsrrrnnnnnvvnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnennnn 210 Chapter 9 General Setting OptiOnS missctiicsscsapeisonsormaaniisanevaunaniins 216 Ch Me E 218 9 2 Search Admin Glen 221 9 3 Site and Equipment Configuration vrrnnnnnvvnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnn 222 9 3 1 Object Hierarchy Overview mmmmmsrrrurrnrnrvverernvvvrrnrnnererrnnnnnnnarnnnennnnnnsnnnnnnnnnnen 222 93 2 Site and Equipment Coniiguration uumuseenmeieeuidmicuisenmenvme ede 224 CC WEN un de El EE 226 9 3 4 Creating and Editing Virtual Equipment snvrnnnrnnnrrrnnnonrrrnnnnnnnnnnrnnnrrnnnnennnne 230 195 JOER 232 94 USEC e EE 233 9 4 1 Customizing Display Preferences Non Administrator Users Only 233 9 4 2 Customizing Public Admin only and Private Menu Iems 236 9 4 3 Configuring Public and Private Charts 238 StarQuality User Manual Contents 9 4 4 Setting E mail Addresses Admin oh 243 9 5 Templates admin Only siscsiccsccscsasscssetssscesecncsencarsennasencscessnseancssiossscssesesasesncasu
162. for the following StarQuality O User Manual Installation Installing StarQuality E Operating system user name to be created E Operating system group to be created E Directory below the opt directory to be used by StarQuality E Profile file to be used E Type of StarQuality installation If the user and the directory already exist but the installer cannot find a valid StarQuality installation in the directory then it asks whether it should continue or not If it finds a StarQuality it stops until all StarQuality modules are stopped The installer prompts for the installation type that is if you are installing an additional server Answer No to this prompt WARNING YOU SHOULD ONLY ANSWER YES TO THE FOLLOWING QUESTION WARNING IF YOU ARE INSTALLING AN ADDITIONAL COLLECTOR SERVER WARNING OR YOU ARE UPGRADING SUCH AN ADDITIONAL COLLECTOR SERVER QUESTION Are you installing a collector server Y N N 2 6 2 5 Apache Configuration If you are not installing a data collector the installer asks whether it should configure the Apache WEB server or you will configure it later This question is among the few yes no questions for which the installer stores the given answer and sets the default to your previous answer when running a second time and can accept this default answer in silent mode automatically If you answer Yes the ins
163. g installation steps Completed Apache stopped Add firewall port StarQuality WEB TCP 80 Wed Nov 5 17 24 27 2008 alert httpd Could not determine the server s fully qual Apache is running Configuring StarQuality Add firewall port StarQuality Chart Server TCP 4444 Checking Oracle parameters Output folder C starquality opt starquality lib No value is set for Oracle TNS Completed a Figure 2 36 StarQuality Basic Installation Complete password for the same user 7 Click Next The StarQuality Windows Service Registration window is displayed Figure 2 37 The service will be run with the given Windows user Fill in and confirm the required password It is recommended to use the Windows User Manual Installation Installing StarQuality M starQuality Setup Dis xi StarQuality Service registration The service will run as Administrator with the given password ServiceLogin Administrator Password Confirm password Nullsoft Install System v2 37 Cancel Figure 2 37 StarQuality Windows Service Registration 8 Click Next The Oracle Connection page is displayed Figure 2 38 StarQuality Setup Loix Oracle connection Please fill in the Oracle connection parameters Oracle home fc Oracle product 10 2 0 db 1 TNS ES Host and port localhost R fisz Service name ES SID fig System password Iesse Confirm password farser fullsoft I
164. g Alarms by Time Span You can define the time span of alarms to be displayed The following view options are available in this group Table 7 2 Time Span Options Icon Tooltip Description Realtime view The currently active alarms are displayed D Historical view by date A calendar is displayed Select the RS desired day week month and year to dispaly alarms during that time Historical view by time Specify the time interval hours seconds RS etc Alarm View Options The way the alarms are displayed can be changed using the second group of controls Main View Options The following view options are available in this group User Manual Threshold Crossing Alarms Monitoring Alarm View Options 7 2 2 2 StarQuality Table 7 3 Alarms View Options Icon Tooltip Description Table view The alarms are displayed in a list table This is the default view Refer to Overview on page 184 and Figure 7 2 Object view The current site hierarchy is displayed with icons SS instead of the table of alarms The color of icon indicates the most severe alarm existing for this item See detailed description of this view below Object View Options on page 187 Chart view The number of active alarms are displayed ina graphical form see Chart View on page 190 Object View Options By selecting the Object view icon the current site vi
165. gation is also performed by clicking on the icon Browser ROOT DH ox EE ROOT gt Monitored SUs operation 5 ink EZ EI Name Description Display deleted Elements Iw Back SU 00 10 7 22 0F 1E SU 00 10 E7 22 0F 1E o 4 SU00 10 E7 22 0F 69 E su00 10 67 22 0F 69 SU 00 10 E7 22 57 58 gt 4 SU 00 10 E7 22 58 16 gt SU 00 10 E7 22 57 58 SU 00 10 E7 22 90 1F gt or BEE o SU00 10 E7 22 58 16 SU 00 10 E7 22 90 DB gt ee o SU00 10 E7 22 90 1F SU 00 10 E7 E2 02 44 gt SU 00 10 E7 E2 16 38 gt oe Measures redi su00 10 7 22 90 08 su00r 10 E76202 3C su00 10 E7 E2 02 44 suo0 10 E7 E2 16 38 Figure 5 3 Navigation between Measurements Detailed View StarQuality Q User Manual Viewing Measurements Element Browsing Options 5 4 2 5 4 3 StarQuality Element Browsing Options The Elements group of the Browser also serves for the orderly display of the elements The elements appear in a list marked with a mini icon and ak symbol If there are too many pieces of equipment on the current level the Browser automatically groups them On the bottommost line of the Browser you can browse all measurement types that are defined for the equipment under the current hierarchy level To browse elements Do one of the following E Click on the name of the object to continue the navigation on the left side E Click on the
166. ge FSU3 RSSI min FSU1 Default Built in Reports E BottomN Uptime MH TopN Air Link Utilization E TopN Throughput E TopN Number of Connected SUs Default Built in Reports User Manual Device Specific Information BreezeACCESS VL ce 11 31 11 32 11 55 11 3 3 1 BreezeACCESS VL Overview SW Compatibility Version 6 0 Up to 10 SUs per BTS can be measured Collector type WiMAX VL Network Discovery Prerequisites StarQuality registered as Authorised Manager Traps disabled PM TM Collection Activated Key Performance Indicators KPIs BS KPIs Table 11 6 BreezeACCESS VL Traffic Counters Counter Description second Concatenated Frames Received frames per The total number of concatenated frames received from the wireless medium including duplicate frames There are also separate counts for concatenated frames that include one frame Single two frames Double or more than two frames More per second Concatenated Frames Transmitted frames The total number of concatenated frames transmitted successfully to the wireless medium excluding retransmissions There are also separate counts for concatenated frames that include one frame Single two frames Double or more than two frames More StarQuality User Manual Device Specific Information Key Performance Indicators KPIs Table 11 6 BreezeACCESS VL Traffic Counters Continued
167. ge hu found Done Checking required packages for the schematic map feature Package SUNWpng found Package SUNWzlib found Done Extracting files into the temp directory tmp starquality Done Licence information This program contains free of charge third party Java and Perl libraries The detailed list of components the detai be found in the third party directory on the installer CD By answering Y you acknowledge that your use of these software is governed by the terms of the respective program li 2 6 2 2 2 6 2 3 StarQuality Figure 2 63 Installation on Solaris Basic Checks License Information When the basic checks are complete the license agreement is displayed To scroll down the agreement press either the spacebar or the Enter key Read the agreement carefully before accepting Connection Details of External Oracle Database The application prompts for the operating system user used during the Oracle installation After providing it it tries to determine the value of the ORACLE HOME environment variable using that user and asks for confirmation 10 UESTION The OS user of Oracle oracle INFO Found Oracle home export home AlvariSTAR db product 10 2 0 db_1 10 UESTION ORACLE_HOME environment variable export home AlvariSTAR db product 10 2 0 db_1 INFO Checking the Oracle home export home AlvariSTAR db product 10 2 0 db_1 INFO Oracle home expor
168. gegen S gc 3 N Your Open WiMAX Choice Click to send your feedback StarQuality User Manual Software Version 3 0 June 2010 P N 215720 Document History Document History Added upgrade for Windows installation Getting Started Operations and Navigation in the Hierarchy Hierarchy changed Activating SOAP server new Viewing Measurements Added 4Motion set of discovery measurements screenshorts changed Setting Alarm Thresholds Added 4Motion information Changed Item Description Date This is the first release Version 1 0 December 2008 General Version 1 5 Changed to reflect multiple server group February 2009 sites Added the following chapters E Network Discovery E Setting Alarm Thresholds E Reports Introduction Moved Counters for BreezeMAX from Introduction to February 2009 Chapter 4 Viewing Measurements Installation Added licence loading steps February 2009 Settings Moved topics into relevant chapters February 2009 General Added Solaris information Ver 2 0 June 2009 Added 4Motion to the supported equipment Introduction Data Structure Hierarchy changed Installation Added installation on Solaris NBI New Chapter Reports Chapter modified Installation Added Linux as an optional OS Measurements Changed measurement definitions Added search feature for text including spaces Added Operations drop down menu op
169. gt INPUT1 1x in 1 sam pe edit del Er pe e Oracle Block changes second gt x lt varl gt gt Variablet Oracle Block changes second gt INPUT 1 Ixin 1 sample delinsts TERS i lt equipl gt edit del Oracle Black channes transaction gt x lt varl gt gt VarizhletfOrarle lack hannes transarrinn gt TNPLIT1 txin 1 lt amnle Pia Figure 6 7 Threshold Template Configuration Template List StarQuality User Manual Setting Alarm Thresholds Editing an Existing Threshold Template StarQuality Threshold template configuration Name FDD SNMP OCCUPATION Threshold name Osru pation downlink lt 50 SVARL OSWOCC OUT lt 3 021212 r Expression El Validate Validate Variable1 WMiMAX FDD Air Link Occupation Table Downlink lt 50 0 1x in 1 sample Level m Type Nore E mail eme SNMP Trap Command Continuous alert 7 When Non stop X OK Cancel Figure 6 8 Threshold Template Configuration Editing Modify the required threshold attributes see detailed information in Creating a New Threshold Template on page 168 Click OK to save your modification to the template If no thresholds are based on this template the modifications are saved and the list of threshold templates reappears If there are thresholds based on this template the Threshold Configuration editor displays the modified attributes
170. he Server Configuration editing window is displayed Server configuration Name Application manager Host localhost Login Administrator Pwd L Directory i opt starquality Cycle sec s0 The number of files in the tmp done 30000 SS directory of SQLLDR OK Cancel Figure 9 19 Editing Server Configuration 2 Specify the required information name host login password and the optional Param1 and Param2 3 Click OK 9 6 4 2 Adding a New Server Adding and deleting a server is possible for measurement SOAP secondary application manager and secondary event receiver servers When a measurement server is added a server group is also added to the table in the Server Configuration window StarQuality 252 User Manual General Setting Options Start Stop Status of Servers gt 9 6 5 StarQuality To add a new server 1 In the Server Configuration window click add new The server Configuration editing window is displayed Server configuration Name Server croup METTE gt Type O Other Top Host S Login Pwd Directory Cancel Figure 9 20 Server Configuration Adding New 2 Specify the required information Name type host login password and directory 3 Click OK Start Stop Status of Servers This feature is available for the admin and administrator users only The page displays the current status of servers by color cod
171. he chart For public charts it should be unique among the public charts and for private charts it should be unique among the public and private charts Accordingly a public chart can be created with a name that already exists under the private charts of the user or the same chart name can appear in the set of private charts belonging to many different users Created by The name of the chart designer naturally it is used for public charts only Unit Description of the value axis of the chart Minimum The chart minimum as a percentage or a concrete value If it is not set the minimum value is at 0 A percentage value is interpreted with respect to the average of the values displayed on the current chart Maximum The chart maximum as a percentage or a concrete value If it is not set the maximum value is the current maximum value displayed in the chart A percentage value is interpreted with respect to the average of the values displayed on the current chart Summary determines if aggregate measurement values should be calculated in the table that corresponds to the chart It can be turned on only if the chart has no element for which the Zero value see below is set to the previous zero value Moreover if it is turned on and such an element is created during chart modification or creation it is turned off automatically Short description URL This field is displayed only for administrator users In this field a URL can be specifi
172. he third party directory on the installer CD g Y you acknowledge that your use of these software is governed by the terms of the respective program li Figure 2 64 Installation on Solaris Basic Checks License Information When the basic checks are complete the license agreement is displayed To scroll down the agreement press either the spacebar or the Enter key Read the agreement carefully before accepting Connection Details of External Oracle Database The application prompts for the operating system user used during the Oracle installation After providing it it tries to determine the value of the ORACLE HOME environment variable using that user and asks for confirmation User Manual Installation StarQuality QUEST INFO QUEST ION export home Alvaris1 ION export home Alvaris1 The OS user of Oracle oracle Found Oracle home ORACLE HOME rAR db product 10 2 0 db I environment variable rAR db product 10 2 0 db 1 export home AlvariSTAR db product 10 2 0 db 1 OS user name starq Found StarQuality in opt starquality Installing StarQuality Oracle home export home AlvariSTAR db product 10 2 0 db 1 seems Select user starq and group starq with directory Checking the environment of starq checking is done INFO Checking the Oracle home INFO to be OK INFO Checking Oracle version INFO Found Oracle version 10 INFO Dete
173. hile logged in as root user To install StarQuality Solaris 1 Run the installer application StarQuality v3 0 en bin either directly from the installation DVD or from a directory to which the file was transferred using FTP 2 Follow the next sections for installation details Basic Checks The installer checks the following details E Version of the operating system E Required packages E Version of Perl and the options used to build the Perl binary If the application detects an error during these checks then depending on the level of error it either immediately terminates or asks whether it should continue or not Always answer No and restart the installation Q User Manual Installation amp Telnet 10 10 1 6 E Star uality v2 0 e in hash 3 BOH NFO OS Installing StarQuality Command line paramete Installer started LOG file tmp starquality install log Checking perl ion Found perl usr bin perl Checking OS type Solaris_x86 Checking perl 32 64bit Checking perl PerllO Perl was built with PerllO Checking perl threading Perl threading disabled Checking required packages Package SUNWapchr found Package SUNWapchu found Package SUNWbash found Package SUNWggrp found Package SUNWgtar found Package SUNWgzip found Package SUNWlexpt found Package SUN hcu found Package hdr found Package hdu found Package hr found Packa
174. hold template configuration 03 Equipment templates Threshold Name Level T Expression 04 Threshold templates EE name nt 05 Chart templates edit del Occupation 06 Exclusion window templates del insts FDD SNMP OCCUPATION downlink lt Major V riablelWiMAX FDD Air Link Occupation Table Downlink lt 50 0 Ix in 1 sample 50 lt equipl gt edit del e CPU usage gt 2 lt varl gt gt Variablel SNMP CPU usage Table gt INPUT1 1xin 1 sample del insts lt input1 gt edit del mm Host disc usage gt x9 lt varl gt gt _ Variablel SNMP Disc capacity usage Table gt INPUT 1xin 1 sample delinsts lt inputl gt A lt equipi gt rpi Host memory usage gt x36 lt varl gt gt Variablel SNMP Memory usage Table gt INPUT1 1xin 1 sample lt inputl gt edit del gabi del insts Host virtual memory usage gt x lt varl gt gt _ Variablel SNMP Virtual memory usage Table gt INPUT1 1x in 1 sample lt inputl gt edit del eee ee pen pe Variable1 SNMP Error measurement Table Input value gt INPUT1 e del insts Pt or Variablel SNMP Error measurement Table Output value gt INPUT1 Lx in 1 samp lt equipl gt edit del PS ae lt varl gt gt Warisble1 SNMP Traffic measurement Table Input value gt INPUT1 del insts lt inputi gt Ee or Variablel SNMP Traffic measurement Table Output value
175. home c Oraclelproduct 10 2 0 db 1 SS TNS sq Host and port localhost fisz Service name fig tits ap so System password Iesse Confirm password forsere ullsoft Install System y2 42 e n ge Figure 2 19 Oracle Connection Parameters 10 Verify that the correct values are filled in the following fields E Oracle Home Path to the Oracle Home variable StarQuality User Manual Installation Installing StarQuality StarQuality 11 12 TNS the TNS name to be used for the database connection as appears in the tnsnames ora file on the StarQuality machine For internal Oracle SQ Host and port the host of the Oracle database server and port used for connecting to it Port default is 1521 For internal Oracle 1521 Host can be either localhost Host name IP 127 0 0 1 Service name and SID only one of them needs to be filled in preferably the Service name For internal Oracle SQ System password and Confirm password the password of the SYSTEM user in the database For internal Oracle oracle The password is only used by the installer for the creation of the database user and table spaces the installer does not save it Click Next Oracle Connection continues with Oracle tablespace parameters Point both CONF and DATA tablespaces to the Oracle data computer partition cording to Table 2 2 Approve the creation of CONF and DATA tablespaces User Manual Inst
176. icators KPIs 11 6 3 1 BS KPIs Table 11 22 Traffic Counters BreezeMAX Extreme Counter Formula Members Description CIR Allocated Bits per Second Downlink Aggregation of maximum provisioned traffic of CIR Uplink e services during the sampled 15 BS TOTAL DL CIR 1000 minutes period BS TOTAL UL CIR 1000 CIR Related Over Subscription Ratio Uplink calculation of average actual D link traffic in respect to total ae provisioned CIR in BS_TOTAL_DL_CIR BS_DL_BYTES BS DL USED SEC 8 100 BS TOTAL UL CIR BS UL BYTES BS UL USED SEC 8 100 Drop Ratio Uplink Ratio between number of dropped bursts and total bursts Downlink SUM CPE DL DROP BURSTS SUM CPE DL TOTAL BURSTS CPE DL DROP BURSTS 100 SUM CPE UL DROP BURSTS SUM CPE UL TOTAL BURSTS CPE UL DROP BURSTS 100 dropped and succeeded counted in the sampled period StarQuality User Manual Device Specific Information Key Performance Indicators KPIs Table 11 22 Traffic Counters BreezeMAX Extreme Continued Counter Formula Members Description MIR Allocated Bits per Second Uplink Aggregation of maximum f provisioned traffic of MIR Downlink services during the 15 minutes BS_TOTAL_DL_MIR 1000 period BS_TOTAL_UL_MIR 1000 MIR Related Over Subscription Ratio Uplink calculation of average actual Downlink traffic in respect to total provisioned M
177. ier class management tools each tool designed to fulfill a certain management purpose The STAR Management Suite includes E AlvariSTAR Carrier class Management System for managing Alvarion s WiMAX Base Stations E StarACS An Automatic Configuration Server ACS for managing end user Fixed and Nomadic devices CPE based on TR 69 protocol StarACS is relevant only for WiMAX 16e Networks E StarQuality Performance monitoring system for optimizing the WiMAX network E StarReport Powerful report generator for generating network inventory reports User Manual Introduction Supported Equipment 1 1 3 Supported Equipment 1 1 3 1 WiMAX BreezeMAX FDD ver 3 5 3 6 FDD SNMP Micro and Macro BTS BreezeMAX FDD ver 3 7 FDD TFTP Micro and Macro BTS BreezeMAX TDD ver 4 5 and later TDD TFTP Macro BTS only 4Motion ver 2 5M and 3 0 BreezeACCESS VL ver 6 BreezeMAX Extreme ver 1 5 1 1 3 2 Server Health StarQuality AlvariSTAR ver4 0 and up Oracle database server UNIX OS User Manual Introduction 1 2 StarQuality System Data Structure System Data Structure The basic entities comprising the StarQuality network are E Equipment also referred to as the device BTS Base Transceiver Station and SU for WiMAX networks AlvariSTAR Oracle database server and UNIX machine for Server Health Each piece of equipment belongs to a site E Basic sampled unit SU Slot BS n time
178. iew Measurements ROOT ROOT gt Regular Setups ee view Measurements ROOT ROOT ae Back gt 10 10 144 196 SUs gt BS 255 243 41 22 22 222 gt SU 00 12 CF 89 61 DE Operation Se I Show history Back Submenu Object Time Figure 5 5 Show History E Show links Displays three links which jump directly to the currently viewed object when a new browser window is opened The difference between the three links are the level of settings stored in them ROOT gt Regular Setups gt 10 10 144 196 SUs gt BS 255 243 41 22 22 222 gt SU 00 12 CF 89 61 DE Operation sl Object only stores only the location of the object itself Object with date and time stores the selected date and time interval or the real time display state Object with every setting stores every setting made in the Browser area Name Object only Object with date and time view http 10 10 144 1 cgi bin link pl view MM amp obj E_1001 amp root S_i amp pari S Object with every settings Show links Back Link view http 10 10 144 1 cgi bin link pl view MMBobj E_1001 amp root S_1 amp par1 s view http 10 10 144 1 cgi bin link pl viev MM amp obj E_1001 amp root S_1 amp par1 S Back Figure 5 6 Show Links User Manual Viewing Measurements Operations Drop Down Menu Options StarQuality E Go to Alarms jumps to the Alarms main menu items while keeping the
179. iew SERVER HEALTH KS 101 101 view SERVER HEALTH OR3 o view SERVER HEALTH Orade 176 176 FDD TFTP 10 0 16 10 SU 00 00 00 00 00 view od al 3 s FDD SNMP 10 0 16 20 SU 00 10 7 22 0F p a SUs D SE e FDD SNMP 10 0 16 20 SU 00 10 7 22 0F view mo S Sue FDD SNMP 10 0 16 21 SU 00 10 7 22 17 m dech SUs 82 iommi view FDD SNMP 10 0 16 21 SU 00 10 7 22 31 m Figure 9 17 Device and Measurement Summary Server Configuration Server configuration is available for the admin users only You can add new servers or delete and modify existing servers To access the Server Configuration 1 From the main menu select Settings User Manual General Setting Options Server Configuration 2 From the Settings panel select Servers gt Server Configuration A list of all configured servers is displayed Ib Browser 01 Licences 02 Device and measurement summary 03 Server groups 04 Server configuration 05 Start Stop Status 06 Server events 07 Collector load StarQuality Servers ai Hop a Server configuration 15 items found add new ID Name Status Type os Host Login Pwd Directory Param1 Param2 edit 1 Ge Running MANAGER localhost Administrator fopt starquality 60 30000 edit 2 SQLLDR Running SQLLDR localhost Administrator opt starquality edit 3 Threshold Running THRESH localhost Administrator opt starquality 6 processing Job oe v
180. iguration Network connection between StarQuality and AlvariSTAR machines AlvariSTAR ver4 0 and later Information AlvariSTAR machine IP address Read community of AlvariSTAR SNMP server if not changed default is public 2 From Settings select Site and Equipment Configuration 3 Click the Server Health icon to enter its site 4 From the Creation drop down menu select Add Equipment from Template 5 Select the template upon which to base the equipment setup AlvariSTAR 6 Click OK A basic setup template page is displayed StarQuality User Manual Network Discovery Discovery of Equipment under a Server Health Site Template name AlvariStar Equipment name A 2 Equipment description IP address 172 30 105 210 16162 Community public Timeout sec 10 Retries 1 Default measurement S interval 15 min Z Choose an icon ficen suis seng xl Timeout sec Configured Add immediately to job queue Cancel Figure 4 6 Creating New Equipment AlvariSTAR 7 Fillin the required information for parameter information and description refer to Discovery of WiMAX Devices on page 125 Name and description free text IP address lt ip address gt lt 16162 gt Community public Leave all other fields with their default values 8 Click OK Discovery is running and can take up a few minutes The following window is displayed The green field me
181. ing The columns of the table are identical to the table in Server Configuration on page 249 except for password You can start and stop the servers and check for their status manually in addition to the automatic server check of the application manager The page is continuously refreshed After starting and stopping server s the subsequent refreshing also checks their status The servers can be in three different statuses Running Not running and Unknown Unknown status means that it cannot be determined whether the server is running or not for example it is impossible to login with the specified data to the computer running the server Only measurement servers with running status will be assigned to measure equipments A server may be configured to the equipment and another server is modified to be a secondary measurement server Each measurement server measures all those pieces of equipment where it is a primary or secondary server and after a certain period it deletes secondary server registrations where it is the Gi User Manual General Setting Options Viewing Server Events primary server Due to this algorithm no measurement would be omitted even if for example in a measurement server group one of the servers is started when another server has already been run even though load balancing transfers a certain part of the equipment both of them will measure the transferred pieces of equipment temporarily
182. ing or Stopping the Installation while Running If during the installation you do not want to or cannot move forward the installer offers the uninstallation of the components that have been installed during this last installer running You may choose to retain those components since the installer can be run more than once Moreover if a previous StarQuality is detected then the installer takes the default values from that installation and switches to upgrade mode automatically Q User Manual Installation gt 2 9 4 Activating SOAP Server To cancel or stop the installation 1 If the installer is waiting for an answer to a question answer the original question 2 Press Ctrl C on the keyboard followed by Enter Activating SOAP Server A licence including the SOAP feature is a prerequisite to creating and activating the SOAP server To check that a licence for SOAP is available from Settings select Servers gt Licences Verify that there is a line including SOAP server and it is not colored red Refer to StarQuality SOAP Manual for more information on SOAP To activate the SOAP server 1 From Settings select Servers gt Server Configuration A list of available servers is displayed 2 Click Add new at the top left corner of the list The Server Configuration window is displayed 01 Licences 03 Server groups 04 Server configuration 05 Start Stop Status 06 Server events 07 Colle
183. interval of 15 minutes StarQuality 288 User Manual Device Specific Information Key Performance Indicators KPIs Table 11 10 Traffic Counters 4Motion Ver 2 5 Continued Counter Members Description Uplink HARQ Packet Error Rate Dropped HARQ Sub Bursts 11 MCS values from QPSK 1 2 Rep 6 Error rate of dropped packets after HARQ of each MCS per BS for the uplink direction dBm To 64 QAM 5 6 And Total Number Of Connected Value Number of SUs that have been connected to the BS for SUs Count the whole 15 minute interval proceeding the PMTM file generation UL Noise Median Uplink The median extracted from the actual noise flow histogram 11 4 3 2 4Motion 2 5M BTS KPIs Table 11 11 Common Measurements for 4Motion BTS Counter Description Uptime BTS uptime in seconds Average Backhaul Traffic bits per second Average data throughput user IP packets in both the downlink or uplink direction including backhaul bearer external management internal management and cascading 11 4 3 3 MS KPIs Table 11 12 Performance Counters Per MS Counter Description Average Spectral Efficiency bits bin Average spectral efficiency values for both the downlink and uplink directions CINR db Min max and average values for the downlink and uplink directions MCS bits slot slot efficiency Min max and average Number of b
184. ion Deactivation of Data Collection Site and equipment confi 4 j Navigatior 2007 gt EDD TFTP gt 10 0 16 21 SUs Operation sl path Name 10 0 16 21 SUs Inherited server group WiMAX FDD TFTP name ES Creating sl Name Type Description Ka Back Collection eit den Not Activated rr EC IP address 10 0 16 21 edit del 30010722 Equipment Pa 1782 Community public w 272 IP address 10 0 16 21 edit del Z peA 31 85 Community public IP add 10 0 16 21 goe a f E address 0 16 21 edit del SU 00 10 7 22 Equipment Activated i Community public Figure 4 5 Data Collection Status StarQuality User Manual Network Discovery Discovery of Equipment under a Server Health Site 4 3 Discovery of Equipment under a Server Health Site This section describes how to add equipment related to server health to the StarQuality and initiate the data collection from them For these equipment types only a single device is discovered each time that is there is no multiple discovery You can use a template or create new equipment from scratch The procedures in this section describe the recommended way of creating equipment from templates For more information refer to Site and Equipment Configuration on page 222 and Discovery of WiMAX Devices on page 125 gt To add AlvariSTAR server 1 Make sure the following prerequisites are available Setup and conf
185. ion Downink lt 0 0 Ie in 3 sample ox ont Figure 6 4 Relevant Equipments StarQuality D User Manual Setting Alarm Thresholds Assigning Threshold Templates to Equipments 6 Click OK The system creates the selected thresholds gt To assign a threshold from template to a specific BTS 1 Access the Site and Equipment Configuration in one of the following methods From Measurements select the equipment and from the Operations pull down menu select Go To Configuration From Settings select Site and Equipment Configuration 2 Scroll down to the Threshold section and click From Template or choose New Threshold from Template from the operations drop down menu 3 Select a template from the list to assign to the threshold and click OK the system displays the threshold template details You can modify the attributes as required Threshold template FDD SNMP OCCUPATION Name Occupation downlink lt 50 Expression Variable 1 WiMAX FDD Air Link Occupation Table Downlink lt 50 0 1x in 1 sample Level Major v Variable Measurement name Variables filter 1 Type None sl E mail Michal SNMP Trap 8 Command Continuous alert Vv When Non stop 7 OK Cancel Figure 6 5 Threshold Template Details 4 Click OK The system finds items AUs or SUs belonging to this BTS to which to assign the template StarQuality User Manual Setting Alarm Thresholds Assigning Th
186. ion is among the few yes no questions for which the installer stores the given answer and sets the default to your previous answer when running a second time and can accept this default answer in silent mode automatically INFO Creating the service script so the operating system can automatically INFO start and stop StarQuality WARNING YOU SHOULD ONLY ANSWER YES TO THE FOLLOWING QUESTION IF WARNING 111 THE ORACLE DATABASE RUNS ON THIS SERVER AND YOU DO NOT Ill WARNING 111 HAVE ALREADY A START STOP SCRIPT FOR THE ORACLE PEI QUESTION Should this script start stop the Oracle server as well Y N Lfl n WARNING 111 IF THE ORACLE RUNS ON THIS SERVER THEN MAKE SURE HAT rd WARNING 111 IT STARTS BEFORE THE APPLICATION AND STOPS AFTER THE III WARNING 111 APPLICATION Ch INFO Creating sym link etc rc0 d KOlstarquality INFO Creating sym link etc rc3 d S99starquality User Manual Installation 2 5 2 7 2 5 2 8 StarQuality Installing StarQuality Creating the StarQuality Tablespaces in the Database and the Oracle User The installer prompts for the following and creates creates the tablespaces E Name file name and size parameters for its configuration amd data tablespaces Leave name and size as prompted but point to the partition as defined in the require
187. ipments on page 172 Editing Thresholds on page 175 Creating a Threshold Not Based on Template on page 178 Generating the Expression Using Input Fields on page 179 User Manual Setting Alarm Thresholds Overview 6 1 StarQuality Overview Setting alarm thresholds is available for Admin users only Thresholds are defined in the StarQuality system in order to trigger alarms when the values exceed the threshold There are two main threshold types E Normal triggers an alarm based on an expression containing one or more measurement values E Grouped triggers an alarm depending on normal alarms rather than measurements it will alarm when there are more alarms than the threshold limit specified in the expression on a normal or virtual site or a given device The grouped alarms can summarize all possible types of alarms The defined thresholds can be complex expressions using different measurements of different devices within different sites You can also use templates to build thresholds This manual describes creating normal measurement templates and assigning them to equipments The process of adding viewing and modifying thresholds depends on whether it is initiated from the menu Settings gt Thresholds gt Configuration or from the Equipment Configuration page The difference between these options is the sets of displayed thresholds and selectable objects and the displayed measurement names
188. ironment variable StarQuality OS user name Oracle host name localhost Oracle port Oracle service name Oracle SID Oracle SYSTEM user password The system runs DB update scripts User Manual Installation 2 L 2AL StarQuality Uninstalling StarQuality Uninstalling StarQuality Uninstalling StarQuality from Windows During the uninstallation the application asks whether it should delete the different components If you want to keep a module which is dependent on another module the application will not even ask to remove the other module For example if you do not want to remove the bash symbolic link it will not remove the Cygwin installation The only exception to this rule is the Oracle user you can choose to keep it but nevertheless the application will be uninstalled The uninstaller only drops the Oracle user and the tablespaces To uninstall StarQuality from Windows 1 Run the UninstallStarQuality exe in the Cygwin root directory or select Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Add or Remove Programs 2 Fill in the SYSTEM password oracle and click Uninstall M StarQuality Uninstall Mile E Oracle connection The SYSTEM user will be used to drop the StarQuality Oracle user User name SYSTEM Password o00000000 Confirm password o00000000 Nullsoft Install System v2 37 lt Back Uninstall Cancel Figure 2 71 Uninstalling the Oracle User User Manua
189. ite specific templates If there is more than one available template you choose the proper one Then the system orders the templates so that the ones belonging to the data collector type of the current site are listed at the beginning Refer to Discovery of WiMAX Devices on page 125 226 User Manual General Setting Options Equipment Configuration 9 3 3 2 Equipment Modification gt To modify a piece of equipment Use one of the following methods for equipment modification E Equipment Modification in Settings a Click Edit next to the equipment name or click the equipment icon and select Modify Equuipment from the Operations pull down menu the system rediscovers the list of measurements that can be carried out on the equipment The following notice appears on the page Equipment discovery is running Figure 9 3 Equipment Discovery Message The following page is displayed Browser Site and equipment confi 4 f ROOT gt EDD TFTP gt 10 0 16 10 TC operastion zx Go to alarms Parent site Foo TFTP zl Go to measurements Name 10 0 16 10 Modify equipment Modify equipment without discovery Description Deactivate data collection TE New threshold Uk 10 0 16 10 New group threshold e Spe New threshold from template Keep collected Edit public charts data for days a Timeout sec Retries Default measurement 15 mi
190. item Settings gt Customization you can make user specific settings non administrator users and system level settings admin users The following topics are covered in this section E Customizing Display Preferences Non Administrator Users Only on page 233 E Customizing Public Admin only and Private Menu Items on page 236 E Configuring Public and Private Charts on page 238 E Setting E mail Addresses Admin only on page 243 9 4 1 Customizing Display Preferences Non Administrator Users Only NOTE x This section is applicable to Non administrator users only You can select and modify the display preferences per your needs gt To customize display preferences 1 From the main menu select Settings 2 From the Settings panel select Customization gt Preferences The submenu has a single page only StarQuality 233 User Manual General Setting Options Customizing Display Preferences Non Administrator Users Only lox 01 Private charts 02 Private menu items 03 Preferences StarQuality User preferences Measurement view G icons List C Detailed hemmes Private public and original 7 Single select entry V ves Starting page Empty z Measurement page info Long description Short description Ga rt order og Private public and normal charts E Equip actual results 7 chart time span Figure 9 9 User Preferences Modify the preferen
191. ithout prior notice No part of this publication shall be deemed to be part of any contract or warranty unless specifically incorporated by reference into such contract or warranty Trade Names Alvarion BreezeCOM WALKair WALKnet BreezeNET BreezeACCESS BreezeLINK BreezeMAX BreezeLITE BreezePHONE 4Motion and or other products and or services referenced here in are either registered trademarks trademarks or service marks of Alvarion Ltd All other names are or may be the trademarks of their respective owners WiMAX Forum is a registered trademark of the WiMAX Forum WiMAX the WiMAX Forum logo WiMAX Forum Certified and the WiMAX Forum Certified logo are trademarks of the WiMAX Forum Statement of Conditions The information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice Alvarion Ltd shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing performance or use of this manual or equipment supplied with it Warranties and Disclaimers All Alvarion Ltd Alvarion products purchased from Alvarion or through any of Alvarion s authorized resellers are subject to the following warranty and product liability terms and conditions Exclusive Warranty StarQuality a Alvarion warrants that the Product hardware it supplies and the tangible media on which any software is installed under normal use and co
192. itial NE Ratio 4002 Succeed Transfer Ratio 4011 Succeed Transferred Bursts Qty 4026 UL Air Link Utilization Data Zone 4UU1 UL HARQ Packet Error Rate PER 16QAM 1 2 4E06 UL HARQ Packet Error Rate PER 16QAM 3 4 4E07 UL HARQ Packet Error Rate PER 64QAM 1 2 4E08 UL HARQ Packet Error Rate PER 64QAM 2 3 4E09 UL HARQ Packet Error Rate PER 64QAM 3 4 4E10 UL HARQ Packet Error Rate PER 64QAM 5 6 4E11 UL HARQ Packet Error Rate PER QPSK 1 2 4E04 UL HARQ Packet Error Rate PER QPSK 1 2 Rep 2 4E03 UL HARQ Packet Error Rate PER QPSK 1 2 Rep 4 4E02 UL HARQ Packet Error Rate PER QPSK 1 2 Rep 6 4E01 UL HARQ Packet Error Rate PER QPSK 3 4 4E05 UL HARQ Packet Error Rate Total 4E00 UL Noise Median 4UN2 UL SINR Distribution SINR 11dB till 15dB 4514 UL SINR Distribution SINR 150B till 19dB H4SI5 UL SINR Distribution SINR 3aB till 7dB 4812 UL SINR Distribution SINR 7dB till 11dB 4813 UL SINR Distribution SINR gt 19dB 4S16 UL SINR Distribution SINR Below 3dB HAS User Manual Device Specific Information 11 5 4 2 NPU Codes Table 11 20 NPU Threshold Codes Codes for Threshold Setting Code Parameter R3 CIR Throughput Oversubscription 4NT8 R3 MIR Throughput Oversubscription HANT7 R3 Throughput 4NT6 R3 Total CIR 4NTa R3 Total MIR HANTO R6 CIR Throughput Oversubscription 4NTd R6 MIR Throughput Oversubscription 4NTc R6
193. its per slot for uplink and downlink directions RSSI Uplink dBm Min max and average values StarQuality User Manual Device Specific Information 11 4 4 Codes for Threshold Setting StarQuality Codes for Threshold Setting Table 11 13 Syntax for 4Motion BS Measurements Description Parameter Throughput 4AST Average Spectral Efficiency all MSs 4SEA DL Retransmission Above Four Retransmissions 4DR6 DL Retransmission Four Retransmissions 4DR5 DL Retransmission One Retransmission 4DR2 DL Retransmission Three Retransmissions 4DR4 DL Retransmission Two Retransmissions 4DR3 DL Retransmission Zero Retransmission 4DR1 DL SINR Distribution 11dB lt SINR lt 13dB 4SD3 DL SINR Distribution 15dB lt SINR lt 17dB 4SD4 DL SINR Distribution 19dB lt SINR lt 21dB 4SD5 DL SINR Distribution 23dB lt SINR lt 25dB 4SD6 DL SINR Distribution 5dB lt SINR lt 9dB 45D2 DL SINR Distribution SINR lt 5dB 4SD1 DL Slot Utilization Data Zone 4UD1 DL Slot Utilization Map Zone 4UD2 HARQ Packet Error Rate PER 16QAM 1 2 4E06 HARQ Packet Error Rate PER 16QAM 3 4 4E07 HARQ Packet Error Rate PER 64QAM 1 2 4E08 HARQ Packet Error Rate PER 64QAM 2 3 4E09 HARQ Packet Error Rate PER 64QAM 3 4 4E10 HARQ Packet Error Rate PER 64QAM 5 6 4E11 HARQ Packet Error Rate PER QPSK 1 2 4E04 HARQ Packet Error Rate PER QPSK 1 2 Rep 2 4E
194. ized to the active Second S frames MS transferred data SINR Avg dB Uplink CINR in db average to the number of sampled i bursts Downlink Total Transferred Downlink Total burst transmitted including MIMO B and MIMO AB StarQuality User Manual Device Specific Information 11 5 4 Codes for Threshold Setting 11 5 4 1 StarQuality BS Codes Table 11 19 4Motion BS Threshold Codes Codes for Threshold Setting Code Parameter Active MS Qty 4021 Active MS Ratio 4033 Additional Provisionable Bit Rate 4AP Air Link Utilization ALL 4UA Authentication Reject Ratio 4NTh Authentication Rejections 4NTo Average Provisioned BE MIR 4041 Average Provisioned RT CIR 4037 Average Provisioned RT MIR 4038 Average Provisioned UGS CIR 4034 Average Provisioned eRT CIR 4035 Average Provisioned eRT MIR 4036 Average Provisioned nRT CIR 4039 Average Provisioned nRT MIR 4040 Average Sector Throughput 4AST Average Sector Throughput MIMO A BF 4AS1 Average Sector Throughput MIMO B 4AS2 Average Spectral Efficiency all MSs 4SEA CQI channels 4017 CQI channels utilization Ratio 4001 Created Service Flows Qty 4NTp Created Service Flows Qty 4025 Created Service Flows Qty Ratio 4005 DL Air Link Utilization Data Zone 4UD1 DL Air Link Utilization Map Zone 4UD2 DL MIMO A Ratio 4006 DL MIMO B Ratio 4007 DL MIMO BF Ratio 4009
195. k add new a setting page is displayed see Figure 8 4 2 Enter a meaningful name free text 3 Select a type Tabular or TopN 4 Leave the Top Level check box selected 5 Set the First Hierarchy Level to measurements 6 Set the result window size 7 Click OK The new view is added to the list of views Report view configuration Name FDD SNMP EE Type Tabular v Top level Vv First hierarchy level Mezsurements v Result window Figure 8 4 Creating a New Report View 10 User Manual Reports Regular Reports 8 Inthe Report View Configuration window see Figure 8 3 click on the tables link The configuration page is displayed empty in a new report 01 Report variables 02 Report views 03 Scheduled reports Report view configuration Hierarchy level Sites z Table New table 2 Back EE Seen selected Site description Site name in gt o ok cancel GEELEN EEE ENP ATE GEN Variable Div add new Order rame Name Subname Field at Precision Annual Figure 8 5 Configuration Page 9 Inthe upper section select the hierarchy level Additional Measurements 10 Click add new to add variables to the report view Add as many variables as necessary The following window is displayed per each variable Fe Reports Templates i 01 Report variables 02 Report views Report view configuration 03 Scheduled reports SRT T
196. ksenesdonaksonnunen kue 16 Select Packages Window All Default Initial Giate noenee nenene 17 Select Packages Window All instal 17 Select Packages Window Perl Version 18 Cygwin Installation Process uusscnmimmsennn uesmiddtkvneenbdie me da 19 Cygwin Installation Completon 19 StarQuality Setup Wizard Wimdow eet 21 Licence e ENEE 22 EE EE Eeer 22 StarQuality Install Ng BEE 23 StarQuality Basic Installation Compleie 23 Oracle Database Stall uran 24 Oracle Directory EN 25 Installation ee 25 StarQuality Windows Service Registration rarnnnvrnnnnnnrrnnnnnnvrrrnnnonnrvnnernnnrnnneennr 26 Oracle Connection Parameters AAA 26 Oracle Connection Tablespace Parameiers 28 Oracle Connection User Parameterg EE 28 StarQuality Setup Wizard Completing Installation nessonneeeneneeeenneeenenerrserer neee 29 Cygwin Net Release Setup Program window rrnnnrrnnnnnvvrrnnnnnnvrnnnnennvnnnnnrnnrrnnnernnr 33 Choose a Download Source Window rrrnnnrnvvrnnnnnnnvnnnnnrrrrnnnrrnvrrennnnnvennnrrnnrnnsseennn 33 Select Root Install Dir dt ry Lussseensuisnenn vakuvnn tdi 34 Select Local Package Director 34 Select Packages Window All Default Initial Giatel eee 35 o User Manual Figures Figure 2 28 Figure 2 29 Figure 2 30 Figure 2 31 Figure 2 32 Figure 2 33 Figure 2 34 Figure 2 35 Figure 2 36 Figure 2 37 Figure 2 38 Figure 2 39 Figure 2 40 Figure 2 41 Figur
197. l Getting Started Operations and Navigation in the Hierarchy If during the navigation you access an equipment through one of its virtual sites then after any equipment modification you cannot get back to that point in the virtual hierarchy because the application will modify the current location according to the normal hierarchy i e it will show the equipment under its parent site Notice that by using the fast navigation between the menu items see the above bullet the current location within the hierarchy might change although the page will show the selected object the path shown to the root object might be incorrect StarQuality User Manual Getting Started 25 25l e e General Display Options General Display Options Scrolling or Hiding the Submenu Items E Ifthe name ofa menu item is too long to display it is abbreviated To view the entire text as a tooltip move the mouse pointer over it E To hide the entire menu system click on the icon at the top right corner of the panel Figure 3 6 In this case the component can only be viewed if the mouse pointer is placed above it E To cancel the automatic hiding of the panel click on the hiding icon again Criticak 3 Major 3 Warning 1 Mnor 0 Normak1 nnn wm Hiding submenu Scrolling submenu Figure 3 6 Scrolling and Hiding the Submenu Using the Display Tabs You can work with several open pages at the same time The current page or page
198. l Installation Uninstalling StarQuality from Solaris 2 11 2 Uninstalling StarQuality from Solaris gt To uninstall StarQuality from Solaris 1 Log on to the StarQuality machine as root 2 Stop any running StarQuality module a From Settings select Servers gt Start Stop Status b Click stop all and wait untill all the entries of the list are red 3 In acommand window run UninstallStarQuality from the StarQuality installation directory default opt starquality 4 The application prompts for various confirmations Follow the instructions and questions on the screen StarQuality User Manual Installation StarQuality login root Password Last login Uninstalling StarQuality from Solaris Mon May 11 16 18 25 from 172 3 105 112 Sun Microsystems Inc SunOS 5 1 Generic January 2005 You have new mail bash 3 STT cd opt starquality bash 3 TT UninstallStarQuality QUESTION INFO QUESTION QUESTION INFO QUESTION Command line parameters Uninstaller started LOG file tmp starquality install log Ghecking perl version Found perl usr bin perl Checking OS type OS Solaris_x86 Extracting files into the temp directory tmp starquality Done Using the following values OS user starg OS home directory opt starquality StarQuality directory opt starquality fire these values correct lt Y N gt Y Searching for running StarQuality modules Do you want to drop the Oracle user S
199. l Please select Oracle home directory Oracle home directory Browse cane Figure 2 16 Oracle Directory c Click Next A command line window is displayed showing the Oracle database installation progress Figure 2 17 NOTE Zz The Oracle database installation may take 30 60 minutes depending on the machine characteristics During the whole time the installation progress is displayed in the console If the console is idle for more than 10 minutes check for errors INDOWS system32 cmd exe C NoygwinNoptNstarqualityNlib gt cd C NcygwinNoptNstarqualityWWindows Silent C NoyguwinNoptNstarqualityWWindows Silent gt call setup Main bat SETUP ADD C Ncyguwil nNoptNstarqualitywWlindows SilentNoraparam 1 2 ini Figure 2 17 Installation Progress 8 Fill in and confirm the required password It is recommended to use the Windows password for the same user StarQuality User Manual Installation Installing StarQuality M starQuality Setup Dis xi StarQuality Service registration The service will run as Administrator with the given password ServiceLogin Administrator Password Confirm password Nullsoft Install System v2 37 Cancel Figure 2 18 StarQuality Windows Service Registration 9 Click Next The Oracle Connection page is displayed Figure 2 19 E StarQuality Setup TET SE Oracle connection 3 Please fill in the Oracle connection parameters Oracle
200. le the bar is completely missing E The main menu contains the main operation tasks of the system Alarms Measurements Reports and Settings Selecting each item on this menu opens various submenus and groups displayed in the submenu panel and in the browser For detailed structure refer to The Menu System on page 111 E Submenu panel the submenus under the selected menu item are displayed on the adjoining right hand side panel This panel can be scrolled up and down using the arrows on its right edge The submenu structure displayed here can be customized in order to accelerate the execution of frequently repeated navigation steps E The browser located on the bottom left side of the user interface The browser can contain further submenu items and special menu groups based on the chosen menu items in the upper menu system Non administrator users can only view those alarms pieces of equipment sites for which they have permissions Refer to User Types and Their Settings on page 6 The user name and type appears in the title of the web browser window User Manual Getting Started 3 3 The Menu System The Menu System The following sections describe the main menu the submenus under it and the menu items and groups appearing in the browser These items vary depending on the selected item in the main menu For example Time Span is displayed only when selecting Measurements or Alarms in the main menu
201. lease Setup Program window 4 Click Next The Choose a Download Source window is displayed Cygwin Setup Choose Installation Type oj x Choose A Download Source Choose whether to install or download from the internet or install from files in Lg a local directory Install from Internet downloaded files will be kept for future re use Download Without Installing lt Back Cancel Figure 2 43 Choose a Download Source Window StarQuality User Manual Installation Pre installation Tasks 5 Select Install from Local directory Click Next Cygwin Setup Choose Installation Directory Bisi ES Select Root Install Directory Select the directory where you want to install Cygwin Also choose a few installation parameters Root Directory Browse Install For Default Text File Type Ze All Users RECOMMENDED e Unix binary RECOMMENDED Cygwin will be available to all users of No line translation done all files opened the system NOTE This is required if in binary mode Files on disk will have you wish to run services like sshd etc LF line endings C Just Me C DOS text Cygwin will only be available to the Line endings will be translated from unix current user Only select this if you lack LF to DOS CR LF on write and vice Admin privileges or you have specific versa on read needs Read more about file modes lt Back Cancel Figure 2 44 Select R
202. lity Installing StarQuality on Windows Server with External Oracle Database on the Same Machine Installing StarQuality on Windows Server with External Oracle Database on the Same Machine Before beginning the StarQuality installation refer to Table 2 1 to ensure that this is the correct installation for your system Check that you have performed all the tasks outlined in Section 2 3 1 below This installation type involves the installation of the following components E Oracle server Oracle client is not required E cygwin E StarQuality Pre installation Tasks Disk Partitioning For medium network configurations containing no more than 350 BTSs or 50 000 CPEs disk partitioning is recommended as described in the following table Table 2 4 Disk Partitioning Physical Disk Volume Setup Physical disk 1 Volume 1 OS StarQuality SW Oracle SW Physical disk 2 Volume 2 RAID 0 Oracle tablespaces redo logs etc entire SID Physical disk 3 Physical disk 4 Configuring Network Ports The following ports must be open between the server machine client machine managed network equipment and other NMS OSS elements User Manual Installation Pre installation Tasks Table 2 5 Network Ports Use Port Protocol Direction App server and managed 161 SNMP Outbound towards NE equipment App server managed 162 SNMP Outbound towards NMS OSS equipment and other elements NMS O
203. m the active tables and placed into the archive tables The deletion function differs from the equipment deactivation function for the former one the measurements can be restarted for the equipment only if they are recreated and so the thresholds definitions and the public and private charts have to be recreated again In equipment deactivation however the data collection is suspended for the equipment but nothing is deleted Threshold Modification for Equipment Use the Operations pull down menu to modify thresholds specifically for the selected equipment Refer to Customization on page 233 Editing Charts for Equipment Use the Operations pull down menu to modify charts specifically for the selected equipment or scroll down to the threshold menu at the bottom of the page Refer to Configuring Public and Private Charts on page 238 User Manual General Setting Options Creating and Editing Virtual Equipment 9 3 4 StarQuality Creating and Editing Virtual Equipment When creating a virtual equipment you specify only the name and an optional description After the creation the virtual equipment can also be modified A newly created virtual equipment has a single parent object with the current site but later it can be placed under other sites as well Accordingly the parent site is a pull down menu suitable for choosing more elements where the order in which the elements are displayed depends primarily o
204. mamnaskmemasnsaimeesniiue 53 Cygwin Installation Gompletion uumuvsserveiusseeeemisneie vensserniskenieiimeivie 53 StarQuality Setup Wizard Window nnna 55 Licence Agreement LLsn as seanenamemesdianpiddgene 56 Choose Components maset smeden teats cee 56 StarQuality E re e BEE 57 StarQuality Basic Installation CGomplete A 57 StarQuality Windows Service Registration rrrnrrnnnnnnrrrnnnonnnrvnnnrnnnrnnnnrnrrnnnernnnnne 58 Oracle Connection FS eege Eegiel ees deet 58 User Manual Figures Figure 2 58 Figure 2 59 Figure 2 60 Figure 2 61 Figure 2 62 Figure 2 63 Figure 2 64 Figure 2 65 Figure 2 66 Figure 2 67 Figure 2 68 Figure 2 69 Figure 2 70 Figure 2 71 Figure 2 72 Figure 3 1 Figure 3 2 Figure 3 3 Figure 3 4 Figure 3 5 Figure 3 6 Figure 3 7 Figure 4 1 Figure 4 2 Figure 4 3 Figure 4 4 Figure 4 5 Figure 4 6 Figure 4 7 Figure 4 8 StarQuality Oracle Connection Tablespace Parameiers 59 Oracle Connection User Parameiers neet 60 StarQuality Setup Wizard Completing Installation nessonnnneeenneeenneeeenerrserrr neee 60 Installation on Solaris Basic CHECKS Larammssmtmdmmnmimemem mane 65 Installing Embedded Oracle Database AAA 66 Installation on Solaris Basic Checks AAA 75 Installation on Solaris Basic Checks rsenrrnrnnrnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnvnnnnnavennnnnrnnvenennnnnnnnn 84 Server Status Window Lesere 91 Licence Configuration Window AEN 94 Configuring SOAP E 98 Serve
205. mbols 8 Symbols 10 Symbols gt 10 Symbols MCS Distribution 19 MCS values from Throughput of each MCS for the uplink and downlink Downlink Bit directi ownlink Bits per QPSK 1 2 rep 6 irections Second MCS Distribution Uplink 1 Bits per Second 64 QAM 1 2 MIMO B StarQuality Gi User Manual Device Specific Information Key Performance Indicators KPIs Table 11 10 Traffic Counters 4Motion Ver 2 5 Continued Counter Members Description Retransmission Downlink HARQ Sub Bursts Total 0 Retransmissions 1 Retransmission 2 Retransmissions 3 Retransmissions 4 Retransmissions gt 4 Retransmissions Number of transactions with a certain number of retransmissions per BS for the downlink direction SINR Distribution Downlink lt 3 dB 3 9dB 9 13 dB 13 17 dB 17 21 dB gt 21 dB Percentages of CPEs per SINR range for downlink per bs SINR Distribution Uplink lt 3 dB 3 7 dB 7 11 dB 11 15 dB 15 19 dB gt 19dB Percentages of CPEs per SINR range for Uplink per bs Spectral Efficiency of all MS Bits Bin Average UL Average DL Max UL Max DL Peak and average spectral efficiency values for all MSs in a BS for both downlink and uplink directions Throughput Bits per Second UL Throughput DL Total DL MIMO A BF DL MIMO B Average sector throughput per BS each measurement represents the average throughput of the passed sampling
206. n aa 15 min ZX Choose an icon E Jicon_equip pne x Server group wimax FDD TFTP WiMAX FDD TFTP Sl Figure 9 4 Equipment Modification Window StarQuality Gi User Manual General Setting Options Equipment Configuration 9 3 3 3 StarQuality b Modify each parameter and click OK The equipment configuration page is displayed E Equipment modification from the site when viewing sites use the edit link in the equipment lines or select Modify Equipment from the Operations pull down menu to display the same page as in the previous item with the only difference that after the modification the system returns to the site page Equipment modification without discovery During Equipment Modification only the equipment parameters are modified and not measurements Accordingly the StarQuality does not carry out the equipment discovery and consequently the modifications can be performed faster provided you modify equipment parameters only Activating deactivating data collection In the Operations pull down menu either Activate or Deactivate data collection appears depending on the equipment status The turning on and off Data Collection operations corresponds to the setting and clearing of the Collect data check box in Equipment Modification page see Figure 9 4 After turning off the data collection the StarQuality does not collect data from the equipment until the switch is turned back but it does not delete the eq
207. n whether they have been selected to the equipment before To create a new virtual equipment 1 In Settings gt Site and Equipment Configuration select the site to which to adda new virtual equipment by clicking on its icon you can also add virtual equipment directly to the ROOT 2 From the Creating pull down menu select New Public admin only or Private Virtual Equipment 3 Specify the name and an optional description To modify a virtual equipment Use the following methods to modify E Basic parameters Click edit next to the virtual equipment entry and modify the name and description as required You can also modify the parent basic and virtual sites using the parent site pull down menu Site and equipment confi 4 ox ROOT gt new Test Site FDD gt Test Operation 7 Parent site ite new Test Site FDD ite ROOT ROOT Name ite 10 0 16 10 SUs og ite 10 0 16 20 SUs Description ite 10 0 16 21 SUs ite 10 0 16 40 SUs h n gt ite 10 0 22 252 SUs Choose an icon ite FDD SNMP ite FDD TFTP ite SERVER HEALTH ite TDD e new Test Site FDD Virtual site Monitored SUs Figure 9 6 Virtual Equipment Modification User Manual General Setting Options Creating and Editing Virtual Equipment E Assigning measurements and charts a Click on the equipment icon b Select either add new to add charts or measurements or del to delete the equipment c To choose a measu
208. nacaces 245 9 6 Server Configuration and Management Admin only rnnnnvnnnvvvnnnnnnnnnnnvevvvevennnnnn 246 9 6 1 e EE 246 e 247 9 6 3 Device and Measurement Summary AEN 249 964 Server e le le TEE 249 9 6 5 Start Stop Status E 253 9 6 6 Viewing Server Events Ak 254 967 Collector Loads urne a ER EE REEE 255 Chef TT UU t BE 258 9 8 User Administration Admin Only rannnvvvvvevennnnnnnvnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnvnvennnnnnnvnnneveennnr 261 9 8 1 Registering Modifying USCIS viiicciccccccccesisieccsceeecesnnssseneeeaeeegieessseseeneneneneeessnanitie 261 982 User Permissions age gegen 262 9 8 3 High Availability Fett egene eege geen 265 Chapter 10 Northbound Interface NB uumssmeeinssedsisenreossseneberieet 266 10 1 INtrodUcCtioh sssiisasies sccnaraiansensnncanencanteowatewcawannainnneaien enn ananasaaneatnsaatancinteeesnereiantauanaiens 268 10 2 e mail Notifications of StarQuality Server Events rrnnnnvnnnnnnnnvvnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnne 269 10 3 e mail Notifications and Traps of Threshold Crossing EventS wrnnnnnnvvnnnnnner 270 10 3 1 e Mail Notifications vvs 270 10 3 2 SNMP Trap Notifications Li 2amesnasneermasisenisnioddumr vev dandnmidne 270 10 4 EIER Luanda 271 Chapter 11 Device Specifice JEE Ste Arendt ERR ENgEN EAR ERAN 212 ORIENT isjisissssiiestinaiiiinisinninnenateoaos pse tanases iaaiiai isansa dianani aiseria 274 11 2 BreezeMAX FDD and TDD Equipment rnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnr 2
209. ndicators KPIs Table 11 17 NPU Counters Continued Counter Members Description Comments R3 Total MIR Bits Per Uplink Average over 15 min ASNGW KPI Second Downlink period based on aggregation of MIR from all served BSs R6 CIR Throughput Uplink Average over 15 min ASNGW KPI Oversubscription period based on Downlink aggregation of CIR from all served BSs R6 MIR Throughput Uplink Average over 15 min ASNGW KPI Oversubscription period based on Downlink i aggregation of MIR from all served BSs R6 CIR Throughput Uplink Ratio is a calculation of ASNGW KPI Oversubscription average actual traffic Downlink f rate over R6 in respect to total provisioned CIR in R6 MIR Throughput Uplink Ratio is a calculation of ASNGW KPI Oversubscription average actual traffic Downlink i rate over R6 in respect to total provisioned MIR in R6 Throughput Bits per Uplink Average total bytes ASNGW KPI Second i transferred over R3 with Downlink i the active period to show average rate over R6 R6 Total CIR Bits per Uplink Average over 15 min ASNGW KPI Second Downlink period based on aggregation of CIR from all served BSs R6 Total MIR Bits per Uplink Average over 15 min ASNGW KPI Second Downlink period based on aggregation of MIR from all served BSs Service Flow usage Value Ratio shows number of ASNGW KPI Ratio service flows in respect to maximum allowed of 36000 s
210. nditions will be free from significant defects in materials and workmanship for a period of fourteen 14 months from the date of shipment of a given Product to Purchaser the Warranty Period Alvarion will at its sole option and as Purchaser s sole remedy repair or replace any defective Product in accordance with Alvarion standard R amp R procedure Q User Manual Legal Rights b With respect to the Firmware Alvarion warrants the correct functionality according to the attached documentation for a period of fourteen 14 month from invoice date the Warranty Period During the Warranty Period Alvarion may release to its Customers firmware updates which include additional performance improvements and or bug fixes upon availability the Warranty Bug fixes temporary patches and or workarounds may be supplied as Firmware updates Additional hardware if required to install or use Firmware updates must be purchased by the Customer Alvarion will be obligated to support solely the two 2 most recent Software major releases ALVARION SHALL NOT BE LIABLE UNDER THIS WARRANTY IF ITS TESTING AND EXAMINATION DISCLOSE THAT THE ALLEGED DEFECT IN THE PRODUCT DOES NOT EXIST OR WAS CAUSED BY PURCHASER S OR ANY THIRD PERSON S MISUSE NEGLIGENCE IMPROPER INSTALLATION OR IMPROPER TESTING UNAUTHORIZED ATTEMPTS TO REPAIR OR ANY OTHER CAUSE BEYOND THE RANGE OF THE INTENDED USE OR BY ACCIDENT FIRE LIGHTNING OR OTHER HAZARD
211. ng Alarms describes the alarms and how to navigate view and filter them It also explains how to download data to Excel files Chapter 8 Reports Setting and viewing reports Chapter 9 General Setting Options describes how to set the site and equipment configuration thresholds customizing server configuration and management audit trail and user administration Chapter 10 Northbound Interface NBI describes the StarQuality Northbound Interface NBI functionality Chapter 11 Device Specific Information contains details about software compatibility traffic and performance counters codes for thresholds and default built in reports Glossary Explanation of commonly used terms StarQuality User Manual Contents Contents EE EE ERTEN ERAAN 1 NEE ue E 3 Tedd GONG E 3 1 1 2 STAR Management Suite Cverview AEN 3 113 Supported EQuIOMMe I cceccesscorcavsactegscarnrcnseas tcctaeisiertenaeittacetanni tea aeolian 4 12 System Data Stee iiss vvs neeamaemkne 5 1 3 User Types and Their Settings rrrrnvvnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnen 6 rer 2 ni AAA EAR EA 8 2 1 ut E E 10 211 Installation RK e 10 2 1 2 General PE FJES EE 11 2 2 Installing StarQuality on Windows Server with Internal Oracle Database 13 221 GIE e 14865 ussgs vssarasmssamtamuGds nemsnnedn 13 Ce EE ln EU he 20 2 3 Installing StarQuality on Windows Server with External Oracle Database on
212. ng Oracle database information should be available when installing StarQuality Service name SID TNS Password for SYSTEM user Installing Cygwin Cygwin is a UNIX like environment for Windows StarQuality operation commands must always be executed from a cygwin window The Cygwin Installation files can be downloaded from the internet see To download and install Cygwin from the Internet on page 20 or Alvarion FTP Server see below To download and install Cygwin from the Alvarion FTP server 1 Download the CygwinFromWwwGoh4Com zip file from ftp downloads alvarion com StarSuite Star Quality Installations Username and password required when connecting as alvarioncustomer 2 Extract the zip file into a folder with a path that does not include spaces 3 From the extracted files run the setup exe file The Cygwin Net Release Setup Program window is displayed User Manual Installation Pre installation Tasks Cygwin Setup Eat EN Cygwin Net Release Setup Program This setup program is used for the initial installation of the Cygwin environment as well as all subsequent updates Make sure to remember where you saved it The pages that follow will quide you through the installation Please note that Cygwin consists of a large number of packages spanning wide variety of purposes We only install a base set of packages by default You can always run this program at any time in the future to add remove
213. ng Started 3 6 Editing Objects Editing Objects This section explains the general editing principles of the system The various possibilities of editing different kinds of objects are discussed in detail in the corresponding sections The list of editable objects is displayed in a table that with the exception of the Site equipment measurement Configuration page contains the most important attributes of the objects In the Settings menu you can edit the various objects of the system gt To edit objects Use one of the following options when available Table 3 2 Editing Objects To Do this Comments Delete an object only if it has no sub elements Click del The system always prompts to confirm the action before it is executed Modify an oblect Click edit and modify the parameters Click OK or Cancel Create a new simple object Click add new Create objects based on a template Click from template Create objects based on another object Click copy from Perform other editing operations Use the pull down menu available on the screen Applicable in case of normal and virtual sites StarQuality User Manual 4 Chapter Network Discovery Network Discovery In this chapter StarQuality Overview on page 122 Discovery of WiMAX Devices on page 125 Discovery of Equipment under a Server Health Site
214. ng a StarQuality Licence NOTE x Depending on what license is present before the upgrade the new license might deactivate the collection on certain collectors Click Reactivate eqs to start the collection on all devices see Figure 2 66 A message will appear showing how many devices were activated StarQuality alvarion gt Critical O Major 0 Warning 0 Minor 0 Normal O WR mmm mm mmm VERSION 2 0 5 01 Licences 02 Device and measurement summary Licence configuration 03 Server groups 04 Server configuration a Feet kees 05 Start I Stop Status Siew E 06 Server events Tu 07 Collector load Current database ID 2558609689 ee PYSR C SNMP 3 0 PYSR C WIMAX 4MOTION 3 0 PYSR C WIMAX FDD TFTP 3 0 PYSR DEVICE PVSR DEVICE WIMAX BS PVSR DEVICE WIMAX SU PYSR SOAP 3 0 Figure 2 66 Licence Configuration Window StarQuality a User Manual Installation Additional Installation Information 2 9 Additional Installation Information 2 9 1 Firewall Settings For proper operation of StarQuality the following connections should be enabled on the firewall between the system components Table 2 16 Firewall Settings From To Port StarQuality server server running StarQuality Oracle server Oracle SQL Net by default TCP 1521 all modules including the WEB interface and the data collector components too User machines StarQuality WEB server HTTP
215. ngs For each item in the submenu panel different items appear in the Browser For non administrator users the submenus used to make changes are not displayed and the other submenus are displayed selectively based on the access rights of the user E Search Searching the configured objects based on sites equipment names see Search Admin only on page 221 Site and equipment configuration Configuring basic and virtual sites and equipment objects Thresholds admin only Setting alarm threshold parameters see Setting Alarm Thresholds on page 165 Scheduled configurations admin only Automatically scheduled configurations that the Job queue module could not yet execute successfully see Scheduled Configuration on page 142 Reports admin only Setting and viewing system reports see Reports on page 193 Customization editing of public objects refers to the administrator users while editing of private objects refers to the rest of the users Customization on page 233 Templates admin only Editing various system templates see Creating and Editing Threshold Templates on page 168 Servers admin only see Server Configuration and Management Admin only on page 246 Audit trail admin only Displaying the individual configuration modifications see Audit Trail on page 258 User Managing user settings see User Administration Admin only on page 261 User Man
216. nitial NE Succeeded initial NE Number of initial network entry attempts sampled Registration Ratio Succeeded Service Flow Ratio Failed Initial NE Ratio Succeeded initial NE Ratio Ratio of counters mentioned above StarQuality User Manual Device Specific Information Key Performance Indicators KPIs Table 11 16 Traffic Counters 4Motion Ver 3 0 Continued Counter Members Description Retransmission Downlink HARQ Sub Bursts Total 0 Retransmissions 1 Retransmission 2 Retransmissions 3 Retransmissions 4 Retransmissions gt 4 Retransmissions Number of transactions with a certain number of retransmissions per BS for the downlink direction SINR Distribution Downlink lt 3 dB 3 9dB 9 13 dB 13 17 dB 17 21 dB gt 21 dB Percentages of CPEs per SINR range for downlink per bs SINR Distribution Uplink lt 3 dB 3 7d0B 7 11 dB 11 15 dB 15 19 dB gt 19 dB Percentages of CPEs per SINR range for Uplink per bs Spectral Efficiency of all MS Bits Bin Average UL Average DL Max UL Max DL Peak and average spectral efficiency values for all MSs in a BS for both downlink and uplink directions Throughput Bits per Second UL Throughput DL Total DL MIMO A BF DL MIMO B Average sector throughput per BS each measurement represents the average throughput of the passed sampling interval of 15 minutes
217. nnnnnnennnnnnnnnnn 136 Figure 4 11 Data Collection Active COracel AAA 137 Figure 4 12 Default wl te ART ET 138 Figure 4 13 Network Discovery Results Unix Linux ccscccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesssneeeeeeeeees 139 Figure 4 14 Activating Data Collection UNIX A 140 Figure 4 15 Data Collection Active UNI 141 Figure 4 16 Setting Discovery to a Gchecdule AEN 142 Figure 4 17 Scheduled Contouraton EE 144 Figure 5 1 The Measurements Main Menu Item with the Browser and the Icon View 147 Figure 52 Hierarchy Ol Egeter ahead Mavs ianiai 148 Figure 5 3 Navigation between Measurements Detailed View 151 Figure 5 4 Measurements Operation drop down Menu cccceeccceeeeeeceeeeeeneeeeteeeeeeeeeeeaeeees 152 Figure 5 5 S r HIStory E 153 eieiei 153 Figure 5 7 Logical BS History Wimdow AANEREN 154 Figure 5 8 Display with Flash Options ccccecceeeeeeeeeee essences eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaaeeeeeeenaeeesesneeees 156 Figure 5 9 Advanced Search ec ccscassndesesceasntcenscenassneadiescant sects cemeaucdhpadsnentactuatacctneasSeandeneasvetaletea 159 Figure 5 10 Measurements Search Results rsasvnnrnvvnrnnnvnnrnvnnrnnnvnnnnvnnrnnvnnnnnvnnrnnnnnnnnnnennene 160 Figure 5 11 Setting Trendlines Window siceciscisceeisecececcevercecevcsartente crn ctuteecontneen veces teneeneeescunnnense 162 Figure 5 12 Examples of Trendline Settings AAA 164 Figure 6 1 Threshold Template Configuration Template List 16
218. nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 95 201 Firewall Settings ener nae aaae N errr ee 95 2 9 2 Mail Server Configuraton EEN 95 2 9 3 Command Line Installer General Intormaton 96 2 9 4 Activating SOAP Server uasmuinsedvupamummdesudsns dd easaaceenenedsSecattecsemncias 98 2 9 5 Configuration EE eebe ees 99 2 10 StarQuality UO TE 100 2 10 1 StarQuality Upgrade on Windows AAA 100 2 10 2 StarQuality Upgrade on Solaris AAA 102 2 11 Uninstalling StarQuallty 2 4 mesirmsesesserenensseennennnknandaekekekunmnennnkaneteunnnkenkdknnneknnntede 103 2 11 1 Uninstalling StarQuality from Windows rrrnrrrrnrorrrrvnnnnnvrnnnrnnrrnnnrrrrrrnnnnennrnnnnn 103 2 11 2 Uninstalling StarQuality from Solaris sumrminumunmsavvnmvivvp av 104 StarQuality O User Manual Contents Getting Started EE 106 KG EE EN tas 108 3 2 The Structure of Interface WindowsS rrnnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnr 110 3 3 The Menu weie zouseeseueetesgeggegee SEENEN 111 3 3 1 eege ege 111 e E 112 3 3 3 en 113 3 SA EN 114 3 4 Operations and Navigation in the Hierarchy evvnnnnnnvvnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnennnr 115 3 5 General Display Options iiss ccissncsccccssnstencssnstetaciadesbeaecccnneteecanessmmantcouernasbevcsnunaacceeus 117 3 5 1 Scrolling or Hiding the Submenu eme ANEREN 117 252 Using the Display Tele ggegugeiegerreg eege ege 117 JG Editing BE ne 119 Chapter d Network DIS COVE saiiiinisntactadinaineneinninniarra
219. nstall System v2 42 Cancel Figure 2 38 Oracle Connection Parameters 9 Verify that the correct values are filled in the following fields E Oracle Home Path to the Oracle Home variable StarQuality User Manual Installation StarQuality 10 11 Installing StarQuality TNS the TNS name to be used for the database connection determined during the Oracle database installation This name appears in the tnsnames ora file on the StarQuality machine Host and port the host of the Oracle database server and port used for connecting to it Port default is 1521 Host can be either localhost Host name IP 127 0 0 1 Service name and SID only one of them needs to be filled in preferably the Service name System password and Confirm password the password of the SYSTEM user in the database The password is only used by the installer for the creation of the database user and table spaces the installer does not save it Click Next Oracle Connection continues with Oracle tablespace parameters Point both CONF and DATA tablespaces to the Oracle data computer partition cording to Table 2 4 Approve the creation of CONF and DATA tablespaces User Manual Installation Installing StarQuality Jg StarQuality Setup ME E Oracle connection Please fill in the Oracle tablespace parameters Conf tablespace SO CONF File CHORACLE PRODUCT 10 2 DJORADATALORCLI
220. nternal Oracle Database with external Oracle Database on the same machine with Oracle Database on a separate machine Before starting installation refer to Table 2 1 below to determine which type of installation to use StarQuality User Manual Installation General Prerequisites Table 2 1 Selecting Installation Types Operating System Oracle database Oracle client Refer to System Architecture server version version installed on StarQuality machine Windows Internal Oracle SW and Installing StarQuality on 2008 database patch supplied with Windows Server with Standard StarQuality DVD Internal Oracle Database No Oracle client on page 13 External required Installing StarQuality on database on Windows Server with same machine Version supplied External Oracle Database with StarQuality on the Same Machine on DVD page 30 10203_vista_w2k8_ External x86 production db 10203_vista_w2k8_x Installing StarQuality on database ona 86 production client Windows Server with separate Oracle Database on a machine Separate Machine on page 46 Solaris 10 Internal Oracle SW and Installing StarQuality on x86 database patch supplied with Solaris Server with Internal StarQuality DVD Oracle Database on No Oracle client page 62 External required Installing StarQuality on database on same machine External database on a separate machine Version supplied with StarQuali
221. nts on page 270 SOAP Interface on page 271 User Manual Northbound Interface NBI Introduction 10 1 Introduction The StarQuality Northbound Interface NBI functionality provides the following capabilities E Sending e mail notifications to any number of recipients regarding server management events E Sending e mail notifications to any number of mail recipients and or SNMP traps to any number of upper level management system OSS regarding threshold crossing events E Performing operations using the SOAP interface StarQuality User Manual Northbound Interface NBI e mail Notifications of StarQuality Server Events 10 2 StarQuality e mail Notifications of StarQuality Server Events The StarQuality server can be configured to send e mail notifications to a list of recipients about various events occurring within the system For example server up down collection failure A prerequisite for the actual e mail sending is the configuration of the StarQuality server with an active SMTP server as described in Mail Server Configuration on page 95 steps 2 3 User Manual Northbound Interface NBI e mail Notifications and Traps of Threshold Crossing Events 10 3 10 3 1 10 3 2 StarQuality e mail Notifications and Traps of Threshold Crossing Events e Mail Notifications A prerequisite to the actual e mail sending is that the StarQuality server has been configure with an active S
222. nts uplink Second formula represents downlink Leave Div with is null Leave the Precision value at 0 Set Weekly monthly aggregation according to the value selected in the Field Enter the Weekly monthly yearly summary postfix The application appends this text to the name of the column if the field is specified and it is not a daily report Leave all the next fields unedited Click OK The Report View Configuration page is displayed User Manual Reports 0 2 2 StarQuality On Demand Reports 12 In the upper right side of the page select the report order using the Order by Column drop down list 13 Click Back in the upper right corner to save changes and return to the report view list To edit an existing report view 1 From Settings select Reports gt Report Views 2 Click tables next to the report view you want to edit 3 In the upper section select the hierarchy level Additional Measurements 4 Click add new edit or delete To create a new report view based on an existing view 1 Click copy from a setting page is displayed see Figure 8 7 Report view configuration Name Copy from FDD SNMP Occupation _ OK Cancel Figure 8 7 Creating a New Report View Using the Copy From Option 2 Enter a new name for the report view 3 Select the report name to base the new report view from the drop down list 4 Click OK 5 Edit the new report as described above On
223. oot Install Directory 6 Choose settings as recommended on screen Verify that Root directory is a local drive Click Next Cygwin Setup Select Local Package Directory ofi xi Select Local Package Directory E Select directory where you want Setup to store the installation files it downloads The directory will be created if it does not already exist M Local Package Directory C TEMPSCyqwinFrom wwG oh4Com CyqwinFromywwG oh4Con Browse lt Back Cancel Figure 2 45 Select Local Package Directory StarQuality Q User Manual Installation Pre installation Tasks 7 Verify that Local Package Directory is the correct path Click Next The Select Packages window is displayed Cygwin Setup Select Packages Me x Select Packages Select packages to install C Keep Prev View Category All Default E All Default entry Admin Default DI Audio Default E Base 4 Default Database 4 Default E Devel Default Doc 6 Default Editors 4 Default Gnome 4 Default vw Hide obsolete packages lt Back Cancel Figure 2 46 Select Packages Window All Default Initial State 8 Click on the word Default in the main All entry package see Figure 2 6 to change it to Install Cygwin Setup Select Packages iof xi Select Packages Select packages to install Lg C Exp View Category Caego New 18S See Package EI All
224. ormation Key Performance Indicators KPIs Table 11 17 NPU Counters Continued Counter Members Description Comments Average Backhaul cntNpuBckhIPort in Average data ASNGW KPI Traffic Bits per Second ER throughput user IP KS ZER packets in both the cntNpuBearer in downlink or uplink direction including cntNpuBearer out backhaul bearer cntNpuCascPort in external management internal management cntNpuCascPort out and cascading cntNpuExtMgmt in cntNpuExtMgmt out cntNpulntMgmt in cntNpulntMgmt out Authentication Reject Value Ratio of auth Rejection ASNGW KPI Ratio in respect of successful INE NE failure Ratio Value Ratio of failed INE in ASNGW KPI respect to successful INE R3 CIR Throughput Uplink Ratio is a calculation of ASNGW KPI Oversubscription average actual traffic Downlink rate over R3 in respect to total provisioned CIR in R3 MIR Throughput Uplink Ratio is a calculation of ASNGW KPI Oversubscription average actual traffic Downlink rate over R3 in respect to total provisioned MIR in R3 Throughput Bits per Uplink Average total bytes ASNGW KPI Second i transferred over R3 with Downlink the active period to show average rate over R3 R3 Total CIR Bits per Uplink Average over 15 min ASNGW KPI Second Downlink period based on aggregation of CIR from all served BSs User Manual StarQuality Device Specific Information Key Performance I
225. oups Server configuration Modifying the measurement servers and other servers Start Stop Status Remote management of individual servers Server events Viewing the events that occurred during self testing Collector load Viewing the load of the collectors and listing the unsuccessful measurements at a given date E Maps admin only Not applicable E Audit Trail admin only Displaying the individual configuration modifications D User User admin admin only Adding deleting and modifying users User rights admin only Configuring which privileges permissions the users should possess Password Changing password Other settings that are directly involved with the main system functionality are described in the relevant chapters Such settings appear in the following list of menu items in the Settings section with a reference to the exact location of their description E Site and equipment configuration also in Chapter 3 Getting Started on page 106 StarQuality User Manual General Setting Options Overview E Scheduled configuration admin only Automatically scheduled configurations in Chapter 3 Getting Started on page 106 E Thresholds in Chapter 7 Threshold Crossing Alarms Monitoring on page 182 E Reports admin only in Chapter 8 Reports on page 193 Report variables Defining the variables used for reports Report views Creating reports by selec
226. ouput X CIR amp MIR MIR CIR Allocated bits per second The total Maximum Information Rate MIR for all BE and NRT services and CIR for RT and CG services provisioned to connected SUs Stop_time_quarter Provisioned MIR for BE and nRT registered Provisioned CIR for RT amp CG registered XMIRCIR x x 1000 x gt F Stop_time Start_time Start_time_quarter 15min bps CIR Allocated bits per second The Committed Information Rate CIR for NRT RT and CG services provisioned to SUs connected to the AU FDD Micro Base Station StarQuality Q User Manual Device Specific Information Key Performance Indicators KPIs Table 11 2 FDD and TDD Traffic BS KPIs Counter Description Stop_time_quarter Provisioned CIR for nRT and CG registered XCIR x 1000 x Stop time Start time bps Start_time_quarter 15min Throughput bits per second Total symbols used Total symbols used in bytes considering rate x 8 Stop inne Star time x Total symbols available x T symbol bps ZRate Throughput Total Used Capacity Rate bps Throughput of each MCS for the uplink and downlink directions Calculation formula per each rate Stop_time_quarter x Start_time_quarter Total symbols available x T_symbol bps When a modulation rate b bytes per symbol for this modulation rate Number of connected SUs SUs with active services 11 2 3 2 SU KPIs Performance KPIs include th
227. own Limits Specify a condition value e g gt 10M and a sample time e g the last hour The following limit trendlines are available Limit counter The number of times the condition was true in the time sample is shown as a trendline Limit indicator A transparent red area is shown when at least one time the condition was true in the time sample Limit sum The sum of the measurement values based on the same time interval Average and deviation three trend lines are displayed showing the average of the element as well the plus and minus deviation The following trendlines are available Average and one deviation Average and two deviations Average and three deviations The following figure shows a few examples of setting trendlines StarQuality User Manual Viewing Measurements StarQuality Setting Trendlines to Graphs 10 117 4 51 BS 87 111 111 17 4 2 Throughout Export to XL show details 7 000 000 E 500000 8 a A 3 000 000 A A Linear trendline 2 1000000 D 2010 05 01 00 2010 05 08 18 2010 05 16 12 2010 05 24 06 2010 06 01 00 lt WE o throughout EI o total DL Total Trend Mi DL mmo ABF E DLMMO B 10 117 451 BS 87 111 111 17 4 2 Throughput Export to XLS show details 7 000 000 2 500000 i 5 S Polynomial x 2 3000000 trendline 2 1000000 D 2010 05 01 00 2010 05 08 18 2010 05 16 12 2010 06 01 00 lt Wu
228. parate Threshold Violation Notification StarQuality nl User Manual General Setting Options Templates admin only 9 5 Templates admin only From StarQuality css xp01 mailto StarQuality amp css xp01 Sent Sunday May 24 2009 3 02 PM To User Subject StarQuality Alarms Figure 9 16 Example of Bulk Threshold Violation Notification E MIB upload Not applicable E Measurement type definitions Not applicable E Equipment templates Not applicable E Threshold templates Editing threshold templates see Setting Alarm Thresholds on page 165 E Chart templates Not applicable Editing chart templates see Viewing Charts on page 243 E Exclusion window template Defining time frames in which thresholds can be activated deactivated StarQuality 245 User Manual General Setting Options Server Configuration and Management Admin only 9 6 9 6 1 StarQuality Server Configuration and Management Admin only The following topics are covered in this section E Overview on page 246 E Licences on page 247 E Device and Measurement Summary on page 249 E Server Configuration on page 249 E Start Stop Status of Servers on page 253 E Viewing Server Events on page 254 HM Collector Load on page 255 Overview Server configuration and management refers to two server types Default server e g the application manager or the report counting server The number of
229. peration E unk Vad Ea polala 1 Mis 7s LG BR 7 18 19 20 21 22 15 26 27 gt t Week Month Year Figure 7 5 List View of Alarms E Detailed view The site equipment icons are listed one under another still colored together with their names and descriptions 188 User Manual Threshold Crossing Alarms Monitoring Alarm View Options ROOT ai Ex BOOT Operation 7 Link Level Name Description al iz me TI PE PET PET FO GE 1 8 15 2 29 Figure 7 6 Detailed View of Alarms In each of these views you can navigate to a site by clicking on its icon in which case the contained sites and equipment are displayed in a similar view Tracking the hierarchy downwards you can reach the equipment causing the alarm and then by clicking on the icon of this equipment the name of the violated threshold and the chart of the referenced measurement values are displayed On this lowest level you can also choose a threshold that is currently not violated in order to check the settings of the threshold value If the alarm is not threshold but event based then the StarQuality displays the time of alarm on the chart with superimposed transparent red rectangles Threshold Slot 1 Occupation gt 25 Weekly 30 min Export to XLS 40 00 35 00 30 00 an AN Si R dl 5 vi 25 00 Rk 20 00 15 00 10 00 5 00 0 00 Sep26
230. ps and exits 7 User Manual Installation StarQuality Installing StarQuality INFO Redrawing schematic maps INFO Installer ended bash 3 00 2 To load a licence and run StarQuality refer to Loading a StarQuality Licence on page 93 Running StarQuality on Solaris on page 88 User Manual Installation r 2 461 A il 2 7 1 2 StarQuality Installing StarQuality on Solaris Server with Oracle Database on a Separate Machine Installing StarQuality on Solaris Server with Oracle Database on a Separate Machine Before beginning the StarQuality installation refer to Table 2 1 to ensure that this is the correct installation for your system Check that you have performed all the tasks outlined in Section 2 7 1 below This installation type involves configuration of the Solaris kernel parameters and the installation of the following components HM Oracle server on a separate machine E Oracle client on the StarQuality machine E StarQuality Pre installation Tasks Disk Partitioning For large network configurations using external Oracle setups disk partitioning is recommended Table 2 14 Disk Partitioning Physical Disk Volume Setup Physical disk 1 Volume 1 RAID O OS Star Quality SW Oracle client SW Physical disk 2 Physical disk 3 Physical disk 4 Configuring Network Ports The following ports must be open between the server machine client
231. pt starquality bin start_stop_pvsr start 7 Inthe WEB GUI from Settings select Server gt Start Stop Status click check all wait for all the entries to refresh and verify that all the entries are green 01 Licences 02 Device and measurement summary 03 Server groups 16 items found Server start stop status 04 Server configuration ee Ger Name Status Type Servergroup Host Login Directory Parami Param 06 Server events le ene Weit mere wm me ht sog mee 9 mm COE Ray UR ht tatty Weil einer wm Vet mm mengn edison boom Em ct sn tty checkin jeet wm me ma sag meng hector Ion wm OP het sa f lget BD edison Seng Rug MER sn itty mg eil Out mag et mm meng eestor eines wm ge a itty COE e weng VAD MM cst sn meeg Y checkin WAROO wm NFD mut w wer f lge Y edison MAOC Ruig me MT st smitty Ym i mamen wg Ian mum chat mr fnt OO eil apen wm P bet mr meng Coke ein staa fea Weil Unrate Rug Uwe Unn het sem fotey Dm Figure 2 65 Server Status Window gt To stop the StarQuality server 1 Do one of the following E In the computer Service Management window myComputer gt Manage gt Services stop the service CYGWIN sshd E Open a Cygwin shell and enter the commands usr sbin apachectl stop opt starquality bin start stop pvsr stop E In the WEB GUI from Settings select Servers gt Start Stop Sta
232. r Manual Device Specific Information Default Built in Reports Table 11 14 Syntax for 4Motion Common Measurements Description Parameter Uptime 4UPT cntNpuBckhIPort 4NT5 cntNpuBearer 4NT1 cntNpuCascPort 4NT4 cntNpuExtMgmt 4NT2 cntNpulntMgmt 4NT3 Table 11 15 Syntax for 4Motion SU Measurements Description Parameter CINR Average 4SU3 CINR Max 4SU2 CINR Min 4SU1 MCS Average 4SU6 MCS Max 4SU5 MCS Min 4SU4 Uplink RSSI Average 4SU9 Uplink RSSI Max 4SU8 Uplink RSSI Min 4SU7 Average Spectral Efficiency 4SU0 11 4 5 Default Built in Reports E BottomN Uptime E TopN Air Link Utilization E TopN Average Sector Throughput E TopN Number of Connected SUs StarQuality 202 User Manual Device Specific Information 4Motion Ver 3 0 11 5 4Motion Ver 3 0 11 5 1 Overview SW Compatibility Versions 3 0 Refer to the release notes for details Collector type WiMAX 4Motion 11 5 2 Network Discovery Prerequisites E PM TM Collection Contents All Management gt Performance Categories checked E For MS data check All MS Basic Data it is not checked by default 11 5 3 Key Performance Indicators KPIs 11 5 3 1 BS KPIs Table 11 16 Traffic Counters 4Motion Ver 3 0 Counter Members Description Active MS Idle MS Registered MSs Qty The MSs are sampled at the end of the 15 Min Registered MS count sample period S count Mee Cty per
233. r Starl Stop Status SOAP Entry isascccsssseisccassascatnensstonedidsensencseettanweveesnoen tales 99 StarQuality Schema Update Window rrrnnnvnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnvnnnnannnvnnnnnavnnnnnrnrnenersnnnn 101 Setup Message niece ne eee EE ee eee 101 Uninstalling the Oracle 0 lt a eee eee ener ere eee eee ee 103 Uninstalling StarQuality from Solaris rrnnrrnnrnrnrrrnnnrnrrrvnnnnnnvvnnrrnnrrnnnrnnrrrennnnnnene 105 Flash Player Message Window rarrnnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnenennnnnnnnennenenannnnnnnennnnn 108 The StarQuality User Interface ENEE 109 Example of Menus Submenu Panel and Browser in Measurements 0 111 Example of Operations pull down menu EEN 115 Mercer Path E 115 Scrolling and Hiding WEE TE 117 Nvidia eee er nee eer eee ee 117 Creating a New Site Server Group Selection rrrrnrrnrrrrnnnnnvvvnnrnnnrnnnnnrnrrnnnnrnnnne 123 Creating New Equipments from Template WiMAX FDD rrrrrrnnnnnnrvnnnnnnrrnnnrrnnnn 126 e Men TI 127 Activating Data Collection E 128 Data Collection StatUS seiccsctentcedaadtrteacrecantacereabacehasestiteantiney EN a FTE EA 129 Creating New Equipment Aaf An 131 Data Collection EEE EE ees 132 Default Oracle Template used 134 User Manual Figures Figure 4 9 Network Discovery Results Oracle rrrrrrnrnnnnnvnnnnnnnvnnnnnnvrrnnnornvrnnnnnnnvnnnernnnnnnnnnn 135 Figure 4 10 Activating Data Collection Oracle rrrrrnnnnnnvvnnnnnnnvnnnnnnrrrnnnernrrnnnnn
234. rding to the operating system QUESTION Do you want to configure the Apache WEB server Y N Y y INFO Configuring Apache QUESTION On which port should Apache listen 80 QUESTION Where is the Apache apachectl file usr apache bin apachectl QUESTION Where is the Apache htpasswd file usr apache bin htpasswd QUESTION Where is the Apache pid file var run apache httpd pid QUESTION Where is the Apache httpd conf file etc apache httpd conf INFO Creating backup etc apache httpd conf 20090512 122852 from etc apache httpd conf INFO Stopping Apache INFO Creating a new etc apache httpd conf INFO Starting Apache Automatic Starting and Stopping The installer application places scripts in the appropriate folder so that StarQuality can be automatically started and stopped Automatic start stop in this case does not include Oracle If you are not installing a data collector server then the installer asks whether the Oracle has to be automatically started and stopped by the same script as well You should only answer Yes if the Oracle server is running on the same machine and there is no other script to start and stop Oracle If the Oracle server is running on the same machine but such a script already exists then you have to make sure that StarQuality starts after the Oracle server and stops before the Oracle server This question is among
235. reate New Site Fill in the site name free text and its description optional 3 Select a corresponding icon 4 Select a Server Group see Figure 4 1 For FDD 3 5 3 6 network WiMAX FDD For FDD 3 7 network WiMAX FDD TFTP For TDD network WiMAX TDD For 4Motion ver 2 5 network WiMAX 4Motion For Extreme network WiMAX Extreme For VL network WiMAX VL Site and equipment confi 4 let ROOT Operation v Parent site ROOT Name Description Choose an icon Ol icon_site png Ke Server group No server group definied sl No server qroup definied Oracle Oracle SNMP SNMP Unix Linux Unix Linux WiMAX 4Motion WiMAX 4Motion NiMAX Extreme WiMAX Extreme WiMAX FDD WiMAX FDD WiMAX FDD TFTP WiMAX FDD TFTP WiMAX TDD WiMAX TDD WiMAX VL WiMAX VL Figure 4 1 Creating a New Site Server Group Selection 5 Click OK The network site is created under the ROOT 6 Proceed with discovery of devices according to the site type you created refer to Discovery of WiMAX Devices on page 125 StarQuality el User Manual Network Discovery Overview gt To create a Server Health site under ROOT 1 From Settings select Site and Equipment Configuration 2 From the Creation drop down menu select Create New Site Fill in the site name free text and its description optional 3 Select a corresponding icon 4 Select the SNMP Server Group see Figure 4 1
236. rement to assign specify reqired equipment parameters see Figure 9 7 Use the symbols and _ to match an arbitrary substring or character respectively The search results are displayed in a list where you can select parameters for the creation by setting or clearing the check boxes in the lines or changing the state of all check boxes together with the check box in the first line see Figure 9 8 d To chose a chart to assign specify its name The searching method described above is similar for this step Choose a measurement Site name Site description Equipment name Equipment description Measurement name Type S or Choose a chart Name ane Figure 9 7 Virtual Equipment Modification II StarQuality Gi User Manual General Setting Options Linked Equipment 9 3 5 StarQuality ROOT gt CARMIT 1 gt NOAM SUs gt MZ gt mz a Operation y FDD 10 0 16 10 SUs SU 00 00 00 00 00 EE FDD 10 0 16 10 SUs SU 00 00 00 00 00 EE FDD 10 0 16 10 SUs SU 00 10 E7 22 57 0A FOD 10 0 16 10505 FDD 10 0 16 10 SUs FDD 10 0 16 10 Sus SU 00 10 7 3 A182 FDD 10 0 16 20 SUs op 10 0 16 205Us SU 00 10 7 22 0F 1E FDD 10 0 16 20 SUs DD 10 0 16 20 SUs SU 00 10 7 22 0F 69 FDD 10 0 16 20 SUs FoD 10 0 16 20 SUs su 00 10 7 22 57 58 FDD 10 0 16 20 SUs SU 00 10 E7 22 57 58 oD 10 0 16 20 SUs s
237. rence into such contract or warranty The information contained herein is merely descriptive in nature and does not constitute an offer for the sale of the product described herein Any changes or modifications of equipment including opening of the equipment not expressly approved by Alvarion Ltd will void equipment warranty and any repair thereafter shall be charged for It could also void the user s authority to operate the equipment vi User Manual About this Manual About this Manual The StarQuality User Manual comprises the following chapters Chapter 1 Introduction provides an overview of the StarQuality system and its functionality Chapter 2 Installation describes how to install and uninstall the StarQuality application and use commands to start and stop it Chapter 3 Getting Started describes the structure of the interface windows logging in general display options searching the menu system operations and navigation and editing of objects Chapter 4 Network Discovery describes the creation of a WiMAX network and all the BTSs under it In addition it describes the creation of a utility network Chapter 5 Viewing Measurements describes browsing options display options viewing measurement data searching measurements and saving items as a submenu Chapter 6 Setting Alarm Thresholds describes how to create threshold templates and assigning them to equipments Chapter 7 Threshold Crossi
238. reshold Templates to Equipments 3 items found Threshold name Expression JW Occupation downlink lt 50 3 FDD SNMP 10 0 16 20 Slot 1 Air Link Occupation Downlink lt 50 0 1x in 1 sample IV Occupation downlink lt 50 4 FDD SNMP 10 0 16 20 Slot 2 Air Link Occupation Downlink lt 50 0 1x in 1 sample Vv Occupation downlink lt 50 5 FDD SNMP 10 0 16 20 Slot 3 Air Link Occupation Downlink lt 50 0 1x in 1 sample OK Cancel Figure 6 6 Items to Assign The Threshold 5 Select the AUs SUs to assign the threshold to and click OK The threshold is added to the list of thresholds for the equipment StarQuality Q User Manual Setting Alarm Thresholds Editing Thresholds 6 4 Editing Thresholds 6 4 1 Editing an Existing Threshold Template When you edit an existing template on which active thresholds are based all these thresholds are automatically affected The system identifies and lists these potentially affected thresholds for approval gt To edit a threshold template 1 Do one of the following E From Settings select Templates gt Threshold Templates The Threshold Template Configuration list is displayed E From Settings select Site and equipment configuration Navigate to the equipment holding the threshold to be edited Scroll down to the thresholds list 2 Click edit next to the threshold template to be modified Browser Templates D 01 MIB upload 02 Measurement type definition Thres
239. riod CPE DL TOTAL BURSTS CPE DL DROP BURSTS 100 CPE UL DROP BURSTS CPE UL TOTAL BURSTS CPE UL DROP BURSTS 100 Uplink SU MIR Allocated Bits per Second Downlink Aggregation of maximum provisioned f traffic of MIR services for each CPE SEN during the 15 minutes period CPE TOTAL DL MIR 1000 CPE TOTAL UL MIR 1000 SU Repetition Ratio Downlink Ratio between CPE HARQ repetitions to Total Bursts Uplink CPE_DL_HARQ_REPETITION CPE_DL_TOTAL_BURSTS 100 CPE_UL_HARQ_REPETITION CPE UL TOTAL BURSTS 100 SU Throughput Bits per Second Downlink Counts the bytes transferred and calculates the transferred rate normalized Uplink to the active frames MS transferred the S counted bytes CPE TOTAL DL BYTES TRANSF ERRED 8 900 CPE TOTAL UL BYTES TRANSF ERRED 8 900 SU Transfer Overhead Downlink Ratio between CPE HARQ NACKs and CPE HARQ ACKs Uplink CPE DL HARQ NACK CPE DL HARQ ACK 100 CPE UL HARQ NACK CPE UL HARQ ACK 100 StarQuality User Manual Device Specific Information Codes for Threshold Setting Table 11 24 SU KPIs Continued Counter Members Description SU Transfer Ratio Downlink Ratio between CPE Total BURSTS to CPE Total BURSTS and CPE Dropped Uplink Bursts CPE_DL_TOTAL_BURSTS CPE_DL_TOTAL_BURSTS CPE_DL_DROP_BURSTS 100 CPE UL TOTAL BURSTS CPE UL TOTAL BURSTS CPE UL DROP
240. rnally discarded MIR CIR The number of data frames received from the Ethernet port that were discarded by the MIR CIR mechanism to avoid exceeding the maximum permitted information rate Frames Received frames per second The total number of data frames received from the wireless medium including duplicate frames Frames Transmitted frames per second The total number of data frames submitted to the internal bridge for transmission to the wireless medium The count does not include control and wireless management frames or retransmissions There are also separate counts for each priority queue through which the frames were routed High Mid and Low StarQuality Gei User Manual Device Specific Information Key Performance Indicators KPIs Table 11 6 BreezeACCESS VL Traffic Counters Continued Counter Description Wireless Frames Received frames per second The total number of frames received from the wireless medium The count includes data frames as well as control and wireless management frames The count does not include bad frames and duplicate frames Wireless Frames Transmitted frames per second The number of frames transmitted to the wireless medium The total includes one count for each successfully transmitted unicast frame excluding retransmissions and the number of transmitted multicast and broadcast frames including control and wireless management frames C
241. rnddezerneainbanannns 120 EE REE EE 122 4 2 Discovery of WiMAX DeviceS rr rrnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnvnnennnnnnnnnnnvnnennennnne 125 4 2 1 Activation Deactivation of Data CGollechon 128 4 3 Discovery of Equipment under a Server Health Site rrrrnnnvvnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnvnnnn 130 4 4 Scheduled Rer ue DT E 142 Chapter 5 Viewing Please 145 WW TE d RE 147 5 2 WiMAX Equipment Measurements annvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennennnnr 149 5 3 Measurements Browsing Options rservrnnnnnvvnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnenn 150 5 4 Measurements Display OptiOnS rrrrnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 151 SECH Display NPE Saeed 151 5 4 2 Element Browsing Options seiscccs scccercciccchones sented shun EE 152 StarQuality User Manual Contents 5 4 3 Operations Drop Down Menu Options aarrrrrnnannvrvnnrrnnrrnnnenrrrrnnnrrnrrnnnnnnnnnnennn 152 5 5 Viewing Measurement Data nnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnvenenennnnnnn 155 5 5 1 Semg Time SS EE 155 552 View Pee 155 5 5 3 Chart SENGS araberne 156 5 54 BENENE E 157 5 6 Searching Measurermente wisscesiceinscncecccsasecsadssetacsasessessnestaantuesascunsnessesteemsnancctieannacecs 158 561 On Searching in General ssonnseeeesnenesenreesrernstrrrnrrrrtnnrsrtrnsertrnnrrrnnt NEEN De 158 5 7 Saving ltems as A Submenu ssssssnn
242. rnet Explorer x After clicking on the OK button the application will start to generate the Excel file This might take several minutes please do not navigate away and do not close your browser Figure 8 19 Export Message 11 Click OK In certain cases a second message is displayed informing that the data may exceed 66 000 lines Click OK A standard File Save Download window is displayed StarQuality User Manual Reports Bulk Export Wizard Exporting Data to XLS Files File Download Security Warning mx Do you want to open or save this file Name y 4Motion Center 1 2009 06 21 15 53 52 xls Type de Excel Worksheet From 10 10 187 113 Open Save G a While files from the Internet can be useful this file type can ry potentially harm your computer If you do not trust the source do not open or save this software What s the risk Figure 8 20 File Download The default file naming format is StarQuality lt Report Name gt lt Date gt lt Time gt Report name is defined in Step 2 A B c D D E m F G i Report name AMotion Center 1 Generation date 2009 06 21 15 53 52 Report type BTS Created by Administrator Collection date from 2009 06 20 00 00 00 Remark free text Excel truncated Collection date to eo 2009 06 21 00 00 00 Number of NE 1 No Granularity level 15 Minutes 00 15 00 110 10 184 43 BS 9 9 9 00 30 00 110 10 184 43 BS 9 9 9 00 45 00 1
243. rt it can be specified whether the user can view it or not E Report For each individual report the user access can be set independently which will be later combined with the access rights specified for the related site equipment so for example in a chart containing sites only those rows for which the user has the rights are displayed E Threshold Specifies if the user may view the threshold violations or not If yes then the system calculates also the domain of the viewable thresholds automatically based on the privileges of the base object This entry is missing for the restricted administrators because they have always the right to see and edit thresholds Modifying User Rights If you modify a user as a restricted administrator then you can grant rights only for those objects for which you have right as well Later on an administrator can grant more right to the user However if the right setting for a restricted administrator is edited even if there was no change then the system automatically checks all users created by that restricted administrator and revokes the rights for all objects for which that restricted administrator does not have right The user can view certain measurements without any special settings those that belong to some of the agents This is true only if the user can view the equipment and the measurement of the agent is the same as the name of the equipment or starts with that name and is followed b
244. rtual site hierarchy is displayed with icons instead of the table of alarms Only those sites for which there is an active alarm are visible The icons are colored by the color code of the most severe alarm of the contained equipment for example if under a site there is an equipment with am active Critical alarm the color of the site s icon is red if the most severe active alarm of the equipment under the given site is Major then its color is orange and so forth During navigation the navigation path is displayed in the top line above the middle viewing area under the name of the tab which can be used to quickly navigate up to higher levels by clicking on its segments In the Object view three further icons are available which are used to further simplify the object view E Icon view The sites containing alarms are displayed with large easy to see icons up to five in a row Q User Manual Threshold Crossing Alarms Monitoring Alarm View Options StarQuality ROOT lox i ROOT operation E Link fn fe a x 9 IAAI Ms HIE 2 13 eS 8 9 2 EE Es 25 26 7 2B 2 Week Month Year Figure 7 4 Icon View of Alarms E List view The sites containing alarms are displayed with smaller icons up to five in a row allowing more icons to be displayed on a single screen Icons with alarms can easily be identified based and their color codes ROOT 4 Dix a ROOT O
245. s HM Consult Table 2 1 for the correct Oracle Server version E Install Oracle Server according to instructions issued by Oracle corporation E Make sure that the database is set to a minimum of 170 processes E During StarQuality installation the Oracle server must be running and the database connection from the StarQuality should be available HM To test connectivity to the database server from the StarQuality machine use the sqlplus utility as follows Assuming that the database SID is testme and system password is oracle switch to the command prompt on Windows or use a console on Solaris logged in as the Oracle user and enter the following command sqlplus system oracle testme If the SQL prompt is displayed connectivity to the database server is confirmed Any error message should be reported to and resolved by the DBA Enter exit or quit to complete the procedure StarQuality User Manual Installation 2 62 2 6 2 1 StarQuality Installing StarQuality E The following Oracle database information should be available when installing StarQuality Service name SID TNS Password for SYSTEM user Installing StarQuality StarQuality can be installed on a Solaris 10 x86 operating system using the command line installer For additional information on the installer commands and parameters refer to Command Line Installer General Information on page 96 All operations should be done w
246. s 07 Collector load Number Time Server Message Figure 9 22 Server Events Window 9 6 7 Collector Load This feature is available for the admin and administrator users only You can view results for all possible measurement times and the list of measurements that were unsuccessful at a given time gt To use the Collector Load Information 1 From Settings select Servers gt Collector Load The list of measurement servers is displayed with the following information General information name type status and group Size of the data files created by the server Total number of equipments connected StarQuality User Manual General Setting Options Collector Load Total number of measurements performed FHCA identifies the type of the measurement F for traffic H for error C Deprecated and A for Alvarion measurements Browser Servers 4 et 01 Licences 02 Device and measurement summary Collector load 03 Server groups 6 items found 04 Server configuration 05 Start Stop Status Name Status Type Geh Import statistics Equipments FHC A Sum 06 Server events 07 Collector load Figure 9 23 Collector Load 2 You can use the scroll down menu in the Import Statistics column to display results for all possible measurement times independently from the fact whether a measurement of that interval currently belongs to the given measurement server or not since the query examines data collecte
247. s currently in use are displayed as tabs You navigate the opened pages with the tabs on the top of the pages The selected page always comes up in the front The tabs can also be scrolled horizontally Minimize maximize tab area I Browser Maps 1 4 Templates ROOT ROOT E Tabs Tabs navigation Figure 3 7 Navigation Tabs StarQuality User Manual Getting Started StarQuality Using the Display Tabs When a page is put in the background the browser window stores its content that is subsequently restored when the user chooses to display that page again If you select a menu item the requested page is displayed instead of the current page However it is also possible to load the new page in a new tab This is the default option when using the Alarms fast menu while in the configurable menus you can select whether the new page should be displayed in a new or in an already existing tab To set the tab display options Use the following options to set the tabs display Table 3 1 Setting the Tab Display Options To Do this Select the tab display mode Right click on the menu items and select either Open in a new tab or Open in tab lt already existing tab name gt Rename the tab Click the tab title type the name and press Enter Maximize minimize the page to entire window Use the icon at the top right corner see Figure 3 7 User Manual Getti
248. s in each BTS for WIMAX networks BTS for common measurements AlvariSTAR Oracle database server and UNIX machine for Server Health E Site collection of equipments and or sites Each site can contain arbitrary many sites and equipment Each site can reside below another site HM Root a virtual site collection of sites only A bare System contains only ROOT O User Manual Introduction es StarQuality User Types and Their Settings User Types and Their Settings In the StarQuality different users can have different access rights to various objects There is always an administrator user admin with the highest permission level The individual user groups are E admin user The user named admin possesses all the rights but cannot configure preferences and cannot create a private virtual hierarchy and charts The default password is admin123 at installation This user cannot be deleted from the system E Administrator has the same rights as the admin user except Cannot create modify and delete administrator users Cannot create modify and delete servers or server groups cannot view the operating system level user password on some computers Cannot change and view the actual licences used Can set preferences and create a private virtual hierarchy and charts E Restricted administrators similar to the normal users they can only view those objects that they have received privileges for
249. s is higher than the value specified here the system generates a server event and notifies the operator Data compression and moving and partition creation the time of running HH MM These servers execute operations once a day though they are continuously running Partition creation is an exception since the daily operation is executed immediately at startup Threshold procession and report creation the maximum time period in hours of former data to be processed at startup At startup both of these servers determine the time up to which the individual thresholds as well as report variables were processed and if the hour of the last processing is smaller than the current hour minus the specified time period then they consider the processing to be done up to the current hour minus the specified time period For example if the five minute thresholds were StarQuality 251 User Manual General Setting Options Server Configuration processed by the server up to 8 55 and it is restarted at 18 05 same day and the set value is 6 then processing will only be continued from 12 00 9 6 4 1 Editing Server Configuration During the configuration of the servers the following fields can be modified name host login password and the optional parameters The host login and directory parameters can only be modified if the given server is not running gt To edit a server configuration 1 Click edit next to one of the entries t
250. s running on the same machine and there is no other script to start and stop Oracle If the Oracle server is running on the same machine but such a script already exists then you have to make sure that StarQuality starts after the Oracle server and stops before the Oracle server This question is among the few yes no questions for which the installer stores the given answer and sets the default to your previous answer when running a second time and can accept this default answer in silent mode automatically INFO Creating the service script so the operating system can automatically INFO start and stop StarQuality WARNING 111 YOU SHOULD ONLY ANSWER YES TO THE FOLLOWING QUESTION IF WARNING THE ORACLE DATABASE RUNS ON THIS SERVER AND YOU DO NOT it WARNING HAVE ALREADY A START STOP SCRIPT FOR THE ORACLE ee QUESTION Should this script start stop the Oracle server as well Y N Y n WARNING 111 IF THE ORACLE RUNS ON THIS SERVER THEN MAKE SURE HAT ER WARNING IT STARTS BEFORE THE APPLICATION AND STOPS AFTER THE EEG WARNING 111 APPLICATION 1l INFO Creating sym link etc rc0 d K0lstarquality Q User Manual Installation 2 6 2 7 2 6 2 8 StarQuality INFO Installing StarQuality Creating sym link etc rc3 d S99starquality Creating the StarQuality Ta
251. se settings as recommended on screen Verify that Root directory is a local drive Click Next Cygwin Setup Select Local Package Directory ofi xi Select Local Package Directory E Select directory where you want Setup to store the installation files it downloads The directory will be created if it does not already exist M Local Package Directory C TEMPSCyqwinFrom wwG oh4Com CyqwinFromywwG oh4Con Browse lt Back Cancel Figure 2 4 Select Local Package Directory StarQuality User Manual Installation All Default entry StarQuality Pre installation Tasks 7 Verify that Local Package Directory is the correct path Click Next The Select Packages window is displayed Cygwin Setup Select Packages Me x Select Packages Select packages to install C Keep Prev Casa Ne B All o Default Admin 6 Default DI Audio Default E Base 4 Default Database 4 Default E Devel Default Doc 6 Default Editors 4 Default Gnome 4 Default vw Hide obsolete packages lt Back Cancel Figure 2 5 Select Packages Window All Default Initial State 8 Click on the word Default in the main All entry package see Figure 2 6 to change it to Install Cygwin Setup Select Packages AG x Select Packages Select packages to install Lg C Exp View Category Caego New 18S See Package EI All 4 Inst
252. siemdaes 306 11 6 Br zeMAX Extreme ssisscsetiscecincictsnssadaestesnscendeneasnsceancddentnnesesicincierscisamnasiaaierniencasaess 307 VET EE 307 11 6 2 Network Discovery Prerequisites cccsceeccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeesesseeneneeeeeenenes 307 11 6 3 Key Performance Indicators Kiel 307 StarQuality Q User Manual Contents 11 6 4 Codes for Threshold Geting nn 311 11 6 5 Default Built in PEST ae eectextdeteteeedGeted tee neren nnee 312 EN EE 313 StarQuality User Manual Tables Tables Table 2 1 Selecting Installation Types EEN 11 Table 2 2 Disk Partitioning WE 13 Table 2 3 Network PE uses 14 Table 2 4 Disk Partitioning massenes Seacdinems durante nonin dan esioacinsivantp Bosc Geneapbenduateneceneaxaneenere 30 Table 2 5 Network eu tnat ttttttt tEn AAAAEE EEEn E EEnennnEn nnna aaneen nna 31 Table 2 6 Disk Partitioning eee 46 Table 2 7 Network OI E 47 Table 2 8 Disk Partitioning re 62 TENT 63 Table 2 10 Network Ee 64 Table 2 11 Disk Partitioning a 71 TEPPE 72 TVETEN Ne 73 Table 2 14 Disk Partitioning seen 81 TVETEN 82 BEE Ee Rule E 95 Table 3 1 Setting the Tab Display Opttons ek 118 Table 3 2 Editing JE Ga eda 119 Table 4 1 Scheduled Configuration sssssssseeesssnrnrerrrrteentrtssrrrnertrnntttnnnttsrtrnsettnnnnnnnnnnssrr nnet 143 Table 5 1 Time Span E E 155 Table 7 1 Using the Alarms LS eee anrienmaans 185 Table 7 2 Time Span Options iacssceccsasutenrceiczceieneetaccunteactcendustth
253. ssnnneennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn 161 5 8 Setting Trendlines to GraphsS rrnnnvvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnr 162 Chapter 6 Setting Alarm Thresholdsuuunssmrassnsammssmasimeensnvies 165 EEE PRE EE 167 6 2 Creating and Editing Threshold Templates rvrnnnnnnvvnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnvnnnr 168 6 2 1 Creating a New Threshold Template AAA 168 6 3 Assigning Threshold Templates to EquipmentS rrrunnnnnnnnvnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnvnnennnnnnnnn 172 624 Editing Mresholdsu uu4qeaesassumuussisnenusinoimsisvs ja vejenenie 175 6 4 1 Editing an Existing Threshold Template 175 6 4 2 Editing a Template based Threshold Local Change 177 6 5 Creating a Threshold Not Based on Template rrrnnnnvvnnnnnnnnvvnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnenn 178 6 6 Generating the Expression Using Input Fields rrnnnnnvvnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnen 179 Chapter 7 Threshold Crossing Alarms Monitoring 182 K WE VEV isaac E ee de E 184 7 2 Navigating Viewing and Filtering Alarms rrrnnnnnvvvvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnvnvennnnnnnnn 186 7 2 1 Viewing Alarms by Time Gpanm nnet 186 7 2 2 Alarm View ONE AS 186 StarQuality User Manual Contents 7 2 3 Filtering AE users 190 7 3 Downloading Data to Excel FileS snnnvvnnnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnvnnennnnnnnnn 191 Chapter amp ENE 193 8 1 DENN ener 195 ET BNR cx asec ected ace 195 8 2 Report Con
254. stomization on page 233 and charts of measurements from the same equipment in the hierarchy only otherwise use the Settings gt Customization gt Public Charts admin only or Private Charts menu items E Inthe Site and Equipment Configuration the path showing the actual location within the hierarchy appears at the top of the page and stay visible even if the page is scrolled see Figure 9 1 To return to a higher hierarchy level click on the elements of the list except the last one NOTE If you navigate to an equipment through one of its virtual sites then after any equipment modification you cannot return to that point in the virtual hierarchy since the application modifies the current location according to the normal hierarchy i e it will show the equipment under its parent site Operations Drop Down Menu Options E The following functions are available for viewing site data see Figure 9 1 Go to measurements and Go to alarms jump to these main menu items by keeping the selected hierarchy item Modify equipment Modify equipment without discovery Deactivate data collection For non virtual equipment accessing different Gi User Manual General Setting Options Site and Equipment Configuration equipment modification modes see Equipment Modification on page 227 New threshold New group threshold New threshold from template For non virtual equipment accessing the threshold config
255. t maximum number of results 3 Click OK The results are displayed as well as the searching string as it could be given at simple search StarQuality User Manual General Setting Options Site and Equipment Configuration 2 3 9 3 1 9 3 1 1 9 3 1 2 StarQuality Site and Equipment Configuration The following topics are covered in this section HM Object Hierarchy Overview on page 222 E Site and Equipment Configuration on page 224 E Equipment Configuration on page 226 E Creating and Editing Virtual Equipment on page 230 E Linked Equipment on page 232 Object Hierarchy Overview Non virtual Objects There are three non virtual object types in the system obeying the following three rules E Sites Each site has a name and an optional descriptive text Each site can contain arbitrary many sites and equipments Each site may reside below another site and this relation can be modified during the existence of the site The initial site ROOT is an exception to this rule and can only contain sites and cannot be modified or deleted The name of the site has to be unique only inside the site containing it although it is recommended to keep it globally unique E Equipment Each piece of equipment belongs to a site This relation can be modified during the existence of the equipment The name of the equipment has to be unique in the whole system globally E Measurements The equipments contain th
256. t home AlvariSTAR db product 10 2 0 db_1 seems to be OK INFO Checking Oracle version 75 User Manual Installation Installing StarQuality INFO Found Oracle version 10 INFO Detected 64 bit Oracle QUESTION StarQuality OS user name starq INFO Found StarQuality in opt starquality INFO Select user starq and group starq with directory opt starquality INFO Checking the environment of starq INFO Environment checking is done INFO Searching for running StarQuality modules INFO Oracle checking INFO Detected Solaris_x86 with 64 bit Oracle so using full connect UESTION UESTION UESTION UESTION UESTION O O O O O O ONF IRM el RROR QUESTION CONFIRM INFO INFO INFO BWANMS INFO INFO string instead of TNS names Oracle host name localhost Oracle port 1721 Oracle service name BWANMS Oracle SID BWANMS Oracle SYSTEM user password Confirm the password Password mismatch Oracle SYSTEM user password Confirm the password Attempting to tnsping localhost 1721 Successful Attempting to login to Oracle with the SYSTEM user and the SID Successful Attempting to login to Oracle with the SYSTEM user and the service name BWANMS INFO INFO INFO INFO Successful Oracle checking successful Configuring user SSH parameters Done 2 6 2 4 StarQuality Installation Prompts The application prompts
257. tage of total number of retransmissions including all unsuccessful transmissions and retransmissions out of the total number of unicast frames transmitted over the wireless port Downlink RSSI dBm Downlink RSSI value as measured in the time of sampling Downlink SNR dB Downlink SNR value as measured at the time of sampling Throughput bits per second Sector throughput as measured at the time of sampling Uptime hours CPE uptime in hours Wireless Frames frames per second The number of frames transmitted to the wireless medium The total includes one count for each successfully transmitted unicast frame excluding retransmissions and the number of transmitted multicast and broadcast frames including control and wireless management frames 11 3 4 Codes for Threshold Setting Table 11 8 Syntax for BreezeACCESS VL AU Measurements Description Parameter Concatenated Frames Single VCFS Concatenated Frames Double VCFD Concatenated Frames More VCFM Concatenated Frames Total VCFT Errors Receive CRC VERC Errors Receive Decrypt VERD Errors Receive Duplicate frames discarded VERd Errors Receive Other VERo Errors Receive Overrun VERO Errors Receive Phy VERP Errors Transmit Frames dropped too many retries VETD Errors Transmit Internally discarded MIR CIR VETI Errors Transmit Other TX Events VETO Errors Transmit Underrun Events VETU Frames Receiv
258. taller asks for various Apache files and the port to be used and then configures it The default answers given to the user during the installation represent the answers for the default Apache installation according to the operating system QUESTION Do you want to configure the Apache WEB server Y N Y y INFO Configuring Apache QUESTION On which port should Apache listen 80 QUESTION Where is the Apache apachectl file usr apache bin apachectl StarQuality Ga User Manual Installation 2 6 2 6 StarQuality Installing StarQuality QUESTION Where is the Apache htpasswd file usr apache bin htpasswd QUESTION Where is the Apache pid file var run apache httpd pid QUESTION Where is the Apache httpd conf file etc apache httpd conf INFO Creating backup etc apache httpd conf 20090512 122852 from etc apache httpd conf INFO Stopping Apache INFO Creating a new etc apache httpd conf INFO Starting Apache Automatic Starting and Stopping The installer application places scripts in the appropriate folder so that StarQuality can be automatically started and stopped Automatic start stop in this case does not include Oracle If you are not installing a data collector server then the installer asks whether the Oracle has to be automatically started and stopped by the same script as well You should only answer Yes if the Oracle server i
259. tax is necessary and and expression or or expression mathematical operations punctuation I logical negation lt lt gt gt value comparators The list of Thresholds syntax elements is in Table 11 5 StarQuality ei User Manual ee d E Threshold Crossing Alarms Monitoring Threshold Crossing Alarms Monitoring In this chapter E Overview on page 184 E Navigating Viewing and Filtering Alarms on page 186 E Downloading Data to Excel Files on page 191 StarQuality User Manual Threshold Crossing Alarms Monitoring Overview 7 1 Overview Viewing Alarms is performed similarly to viewing measurements a configurable quick menu at the top panel is used for displaying and navigation and also new elements can be added to it using the Settings gt Customization menu The alarms are displayed on the most prominent parts of the user interface to provide quick accessibility The color coded summary of the currently active alarms are displayed at the top right corner of the window The alarms can be navigated by selecting the Alarms item on the main menu Critica 3 Major 2 Warning 1 Mnor 0 Normak 2 vn e Figure 7 1 Alarms Summary at the Top Right Corner of the Window By default only the Root highest level group is listed The list view of alarms is displayed in the following figure Browser ROOT 4
260. ternally discarded MIR CIR VETI Errors Transmit Other TX Events VETO Errors Transmit Underrun Events VETU Frames Received Total VFRT Frames Submitted High VFSH Frames Submitted Low VFSL Frames Submitted Mid VFSM Frames Submitted Total VFST Ethernet Throughput VETH Noise Floor VNF Retransmission VRSU RSSI VRSS SNR VSNR Throughput VTHR Uptime VUPT Wireless Frames VWF Default Built in Reports E BottomN Uptime E TopN Throughput E TopN Number of Connected SUs User Manual Device Specific Information 4Motion Ver 2 5 11 4 4Motion Ver 2 5 11 4 1 Overview SW Compatibility Versions 2 5M1 and 2 5M1 Refer to the release notes for details Collector type WiMAX 4Motion 11 4 2 Network Discovery Prerequisites E PM TM Collection Contents All Management gt Performance Categories checked E For MS data check All MS Basic Data it is not checked by default 11 4 3 Key Performance Indicators KPIs 11 4 3 1 BS KPIs Table 11 10 Traffic Counters 4Motion Ver 2 5 Counter Members Description Air Link Utilization All The utilization of available wireless link resources Data UL Data Z utilization from all slots including MAP not including GER preamble and TTG RTG per BS as a percentage of total DL Data Zone slots available for the uplink and downlink directions DL Map Zone MAP Size Distribution 2 Symbols Number of frames per number of symbols per BS for the Frames downlink direction 4 Symbols 6 Sy
261. the for the Measurements menu option can be selected 4 Click OK The Alarms or Measurement pages will be updated according to your selections gt To add a new menu item 1 Select a schematic map created by the administrators 2 Select the virtual or real site or equipment to which the menu item points 3 In Settings gt Customization select Public Private Menu Item the Menu Item Configuration window is displayed see Figure 9 10 A Click add new A search window appears where a search string has to be specified the and _ characters can be used and characters are no applicable to obtain the list of matching elements Menu item configuration Search object Name TJ OK Cancel Figure 9 12 Menu Item Configuration Search Object 5 Select the item to add to the Alarms or Measurement submenus and Click OK StarQuality amp User Manual General Setting Options Configuring Public and Private Charts 9 4 3 9 4 3 1 StarQuality Configuring Public and Private Charts Administrators and restricted administrators can edit private and public charts while admin users can edit only public charts and every other user only private charts The editing of both types takes place on pages structured almost identically therefore both are discussed herein while indicating the differences between them Editing and Creating Charts When modifying already existing elements in the chart the same fields ar
262. the data is updated periodically CB Historical view by date A calendar is displayed Select the hw desired day week month and year to wm dispaly measurements for that time span Historical view by time Specify the time interval hours seconds wl etc View Options Because of minimizing the required chart drawings the StarQuality draws only the first 20 charts and the others are visible only when scrolling down the page You can set the chart display options in the View group E Large Charts the charts appear in one column E Medium Charts the charts appear in two columns E Small Charts the charts are arranged in a three column table Display Deleted Displays measurements of deleted equipments User Manual Viewing Measurements ee StarQuality Chart Settings A chart always uses the whole available area that is if you hide the menu system using the expand page icon or change the shape of the Browser window then StarQuality redraws the chart s accordingly The values specified here are applied to every chart on the right hand side Chart Settings The following chart settings are available E Flash allows displaying the following options see Figure 5 8 View or hide specific measurements by clicking their check box Mouse point on a spot displays the date time and measurement values Mouse point on Show details displays the average last min and max values
263. the few yes no questions for which the installer stores the given answer and sets the default to your previous answer when running a second time and can accept this default answer in silent mode automatically INFO Creating the service script so the operating system can automatically INFO start and stop StarQuality WARNING 111 YOU SHOULD ONLY ANSWER YES TO THE FOLLOWING QUESTION IF Q User Manual Installation WARNING WARNING QUESTION ng WARNING WARNING WARNING INFO INFO Installing StarQuality THE ORACLE DATABASE RUNS ON THIS SERVER AND YOU DO NOT 111 HAVE ALREADY A START STOP SCRIPT FOR THE ORACLE e Should this script start stop the Oracle server as well Y N 111 IF THE ORACLE RUNS ON THIS SERVER THEN MAKE SURE THAT ve 111 IT STARTS BEFORE THE APPLICATION AND STOPS AFTER THE SR 111 APPLICATION Eh Creating sym link etc rc0 d KOlstarquality Creating sym link etc rc3 d S99starquality 2 7 2 7 Creating the StarQuality Tablespaces in the Database and the Oracle User The installer prompts for the following and creates creates the tablespaces E Name file name and size parameters for its configuration amd data tablespaces Leave name and size as prompted but point to the partition as defined in the required Partitioning table
264. the option is not on E sor silent the installer prompts various questions during the installation If the silent mode is turned on and the installer prompts a question other than a yes no question for which it has a default answer then it continues automatically so the user does not have to accept the default answer manually Regarding yes no questions however the installer does not accept the default answer for a yes no question even in silent mode There are only a handful exceptions to this but only when the yes no question was answered during a previous installer running This behavior will be noted at the particular yes no questions later E a file_name the installer takes the default answers from the specified file The installer writes the answers to the var pvsr answer file except the passwords and it reads them from that file by default Messages Questions and Answers during the Installation The application saves the log messages in the tmp pvsr install file during the installation The DEBUG messages appear in this file even if the d or debug option wasn t specified The application uses the following log levels ERROR WARNING INFO DEBUG and QUESTION In case of a question the application displays the default answer between square brackets and if such answer exists If the installer asks for a password and such a default answer exists then it displays asterisks instead of the actual value Cancel
265. throughout EI oL total DL Total Trend Mil DL MMO ABF a DL MIMO B 10 117 4 5185 87 111 111 17 4 2 Throughput Export to XLS show details Polynomial x6 trendline 2010 06 01 00 7 000 000 000 E 5000 000 000 8 3 3 000 000 000 5 z 1 000 000 000 D 2010 05 01 00 2010 05 11 08 2010 05 21 16 lt Wu throughout EI oL Total DL Total Trend Ml DL MMO ABF a DL MIMO B 10 117 4 51 BS 87 111 111 17 4 2 Throughout Export to XLE show details 7 000 000 5 000 000 2 3000000 8 amp 1000000 F f EEN Difference trendline B 5 3000000 ZG 5000000 2010 05 01 00 2010 05 08 18 2010 05 16 12 2010 05 24 06 2010 06 01 00 lt Wu throughput oL Total DL Total Trend W DL MMO ABF E pr MMO B 10 117 4 51 BS 87 111 111 17 4 2 Throughout Export to XL show details 7 000 000 2 50000 8 fr 2 3 000 000 2 a Average and one g 100900 TAY ies D Deviation trendlined 2010 05 01 00 2010 05 08 18 2010 05 16 12 2010 05 24 06 2010 06 01 00 lt Wu throughout BI oL total DL Total Trend Mi DL MMO ABF oa DL MIMO B Figure 5 12 Examples of Trendline Settings User Manual chapter O E Setting Alarm Thresholds Setting Alarm Thresholds In this chapter StarQuality Overview on page 167 Creating and Editing Threshold Templates on page 168 Assigning Threshold Templates to Equ
266. ting Options Overview 9 1 StarQuality Overview The Settings item in the main menu contains many options for changing the StarQuality configuration For each item in the submenu panel different items appear in the Browser For non administrator users the submenus used to make changes are not displayed and the other submenus are displayed selectively based on the access rights of the user This chapter describes some general setting options available in the StarQuality application These settings are E Search Setting the searching parameters E Customization editing of public objects refers to the administrator users while editing of private objects refers to the rest of the users Public Private charts Configuring charts Public Private menu items Defining menu items for the submenu panel External links admin only Setting the external links to display for basic or virtual site and equipment objects Preferences non administrator users only Configuring displaying preferences E mail addresses A list of the e mail addresses of the users User Manual General Setting Options Overview D Servers Licences Displaying and configuring the currently used and available licences Device and measurement summary Viewing the list of all basic equipments and the number of objects in the system for each measurement type Server groups Configuration of individual measuring gr
267. ting variables Scheduled reports Setting scheduled report delivering E Templates in Chapter 6 Setting Alarm Thresholds on page 165 StarQuality User Manual General Setting Options Search Admin only 9 2 Search Admin only Searching is done only by names of sites and equipment Under the Settings gt Search menu item you can search the stored objects in the system This menu is only accessible to the administrator and restricted administrator users gt To start searching for an object Specify a searching string using one of the following methods 1 Simple search type the string directly in the input field and click OK 2 Click Advanced Search an advanced window is displayed which facilitates the construction of the searching string and contains the following insert fields a Search to parent name Yes No If you select yes the search finds those objects whose parent name meets the conditions e g the parent is the containing site for a piece of equipment b Name name of the object to be searched The and characters match an arbitrary single letter while and match an arbitrary string The expressions in separate lines will be in OR relation with each other c Without characters to be ignored by the system the format is the same as above d Type the type of the object to be searched Subtype can also be given for equipment equipment template and measurement type e Results coun
268. tion Site Search Hesults e 232 Figure 9 9 User ee 234 Figure 9 10 Menu Item Confguraton EEN 236 Figure 9 11 Menu ltem Editing D 237 Figure 9 12 Menu Item Configuration Search Objet 237 Figure 9 13 Chart Configuration accessed from the Equipment page 239 Figure 9 14 E mail Address Configuration TE 244 Figure 9 15 Example of Separate Threshold Violation Notification rrrnrrnnnrrrrrrrnnnnnnrnnnnr 244 Figure 9 16 Example of Bulk Threshold Violation Notification rrrrrrnnnornrrrnnnrnnrrnnnrnnnrnnnnnr 245 Figure 9 17 Device and Measurement Gummanm EE 249 Figure 9 18 Server Configuration Window AAA 250 Figure 9 19 Editing Server Configuration rnrnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnvnnnvnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnennnnnnennnnn 252 Figure 9 20 Server Configuration Adding New 253 Figure 9 21 Server EES eege Eege ege Eegen degen 254 Figure 9 22 Server Events Mndom uuasensesssmuasbeniksssdkuetkenniiaubnndaaeingn 255 Foue 928 Collector e ia aaa a aAa Eaa aani 256 Figure 9 24 Collector Load EE 257 Figure 9 25 Missing Measurements at a Given Tme 257 StarQuality ow User Manual Figures Figure 9 26 Figure 9 27 Figure 9 28 Figure 9 29 Figure 9 30 Figure 9 31 Figure 9 32 StarQuality Audit Trail Query EEE 258 Reha ie 260 Viewing the Audit enee Ee EN EAN 260 Users EE 261 User PAIS Os ve 261 EE 264 User Rights Modification 264 User Manual zl i E Introduction Introduction
269. tion and run Run cycle minutes E hour v Discover equipments yes Input file No Community public Cancel Figure 4 16 Setting Discovery to a Schedule 2 In the Creation section select either Job the system creates scheduled jobs based on the parameters but does not run them Job creation and run the system creates scheduled jobs based on the parameters and runs them immediately If the equipment creation for a job is not successful it is not deleted and therefore the Job queue server component can try it later 3 Define the Run Cycle 4 In the Discover Equipments field select No to add equipments manually User Manual Network Discovery Scheduled Configuration 5 Define the Community 6 Click OK gt To use the Scheduled Configuration 1 From Settings select Scheduled Configuration The Scheduled Configuration table is displayed with the following columns Table 4 1 Scheduled Configuration Item Description Links edit the entry can be edited del the entry can be deleted now the system is trying to instantiate the configuration belonging to the entry immediately and does not wait for the next cycle Site name The equipment will be placed to this site Template name The system will instantiate the equipment using this template Equipment name The same name as in the manual creation of the equipment Equipment The same
270. tions General Added BreezeACCESS VL support information Ver 2 5 December 2009 Installation Added Oracle patch installation Ver 2 5 December 2009 StarQuality d User Manual Document History Changed Item Description Date Introduction Added 4Motion ver 3 0 and BreezeMAX Extreme to Ver 3 0 June 2010 the supported equipment list Deleted Deployment Scenarios Installation Revised structure Ver 3 0 June 2010 Getting Started Operations and Navigation in the Ver 3 0 June 2010 Hierarchy on page 115 Removed the Link option for Alarms and Measurements Network Discovery Added 4Motion and BreezeMAX Extreme information Ver 3 0 June 2010 Modified Prerequisites Generally revised Reports Added 4Motion and BreezeMAX Extreme information Ver 3 0 June 2010 Setting Alarm Thresholds Moved all syntax tables to Chapter 11 Ver 3 0 June 2010 Chapter 11 Device New Chapter including information per device type Ver 3 0 June 2010 Specific Information StarQuality User Manual Legal Rights Legal Rights Copyright 2010 Alvarion Ltd All rights reserved The material contained herein is proprietary privileged and confidential and owned by Alvarion or its third party licensors No disclosure thereof shall be made to third parties without the express written permission of Alvarion Ltd Alvarion Ltd reserves the right to alter the equipment specifications and descriptions in this publication w
271. to ensure that this is the correct installation for your system and perform all the tasks outlined in Section 2 2 1 below This installation type involves the installation of the following components E cygwin E StarQuality Pre installation Tasks Disk Partitioning For medium network configurations containing no more than 350 BTSs or 50 000 CPEs disk partitioning is recommended as described in the following table Table 2 2 Disk Partitioning Physical Disk Volume Setup Physical disk 1 Volume 1 OS StarQuality SW Oracle SW Physical disk 2 Volume 2 RAID 0 Oracle tablespaces redo logs etc entire SID Physical disk 3 Physical disk 4 Configuring Network Ports The following ports must be open between the server machine client machine managed network equipment and other NMS OSS elements User Manual Installation Pre installation Tasks Table 2 3 Network Ports Use Port Protocol Direction App server and managed 161 SNMP Outbound towards NE equipment App server managed 162 SNMP Outbound towards NMS OSS equipment and other elements NMS OSS elements App server and managed 69 TFTP From Managed equipment to equipment StarQuality App server and client 8080 Inbound Outbound between client and server Sending requests to 16162 SNMP AlvariSTAR in order to reach KPI 2 2 1 3 Installing Cygwin Cygwin is a UNIX like environment
272. tory INFO Oracle install configuration file tmp starquality scripts deploy or aparam properties Oracle install step USER ADD start Wednesday June 2 2010 12 32 71 LOGDIR tmp starquality log create group RC SUCCESS LOGDIR tmp starquality log oracle dir RC SUCCESS Oracle install step USER ADD lt finished Wednesday June 2 2010 12 3 Oracle install step SETUP ADD start Wednesday June 2 2010 12 32 Sun Microsystems Inc SunOS 5 1 Generic January 2005 i Oracle Universal Installer installer requirements operating system version must be 5 16 Actual 5 168 Passed Temp space must be greater than 256 MB Actual 7741 MB Passed swap space must be greater than 566 MB Actual 8649 MB Passed All installer requirements met Preparing to launch Oracle Universal Installer from tmp Oralnstal12616 66 62_12 32 2 PM Please wait Oracle Universal Installer Version 16 2 0 1 6 Producti on Copyright lt C gt 1999 2065 Oracle All rights reserved You can find a log of this install session at export home orac le oralnventory logs installfictions2 1i 6 2 12 32 2 PM log Figure 2 62 Installing Embedded Oracle Database The application prompts for the following Operating system user name to be created Operating system group to be created Directory below the opt directory to be used by StarQuality Installation 2 5 2 5 StarQuality Installing StarQuality D Profile file to be used E T
273. tus click stop all Wait for the list to refresh StarQuality a User Manual Installation 2 8 2 StarQuality Running StarQuality on Solaris 2 In the WEB GUI from Settings select Servers gt Start Stop Status click check all wait for all the entries to refresh and verify that all the entries are red Running StarQuality on Solaris To start the server following initial installation 1 While logged in as root user enter the command by default it is not required to start it manually usr apache bin apachectl start Actual path may vary according to the Apache configuration See Apache Configuration on page 67 2 Open a web browser and go to http lt ip or hostname gt 3 Enter User Name and Password The default admin users credentials are admin adminl23 The StarQuality opening window is displayed for a few moments and then the main interface window opens A message alerting a missing licence may appear click OK and load a licence see Step 5 4 From Settings select Servers gt Licenses The Licences Configuration window is displayed Check that all the entries are not marked red which indicates invalid licences that should be replaced 5 If necessary load a new license file using the WEB GUI see Loading a StarQuality Licence on page 93 6 Do one of the following E Return to the StarQuality server machine console and enter the command etc init d starquality start E Inthe WE
274. ty DVD 10201_database_s olx86_64 Solaris Server with External Oracle Database on the Same Machine on page 71 10201_client_solx86_ 64 or 10202_client_solx86 Installing StarQuality on Solaris Server with Oracle Database on a Separate Machine on page 81 The Oracle kit included in the DVD covers the Oracle license only if it is installed together with StarQuality internal database installation In case of installing an external DB purchase licence separately 2 1 2 StarQuality General Prerequisites The following are general prerequisites for all installation types E The computer on which the server is installed must comply with hardware and software requirements as detailed in the Release Notes User Manual Installation StarQuality General Prerequisites The computer on which the StarQuality Server and or Oracle database are installed must be dedicated to running these applications The computers should have latest Operating System versions The StarQuality application requires a minimum of 20 GB free disk space Valid StarQuality license required for initial activation after installation User Manual Installation 2 2 l 2 2 1 1 2 2 1 2 StarQuality Installing StarQuality on Windows Server with Internal Oracle Database Installing StarQuality on Windows Server with Internal Oracle Database Before beginning the StarQuality installation refer to Table 2 1
275. type based filtering Other only the operations for the object types adequate for the selection appear Parent name The name of the parent object it can contain values only for equipments measurement reports and chart elements Name Object name Modified by Name of the modifier It is displayed only for the administrator users since the restricted administrators cannot view a change if it wasn t made by themselves From and To When it was modified from till All results Maximum number of displayed results Mandatory to fill in 3 Click OK The query produces a table with columns similar to the search results with the following additional items Operation Insert Modification or Delete Object type Name Parent name Modified by Modification time StarQuality User Manual General Setting Options Audit Trail Audit trail D E Audit trail entries Operation Object type Name Parent name Modified by Modification time Insert Measurement SU 00 10 E7 22 90 E1 AU ID SU 00 10 E7 22 90 E1 admin 2008 09 21 12 40 41 Delete Measurement SU 00 10 E7 22 90 E1 AU ID SU 00 10 E7 22 90 E1 admin 2008 09 21 13 24 53 Insert Measurement SU 00 10 7 22 90 1 SLOT SU 00 10 E7 22 90 E1 admin 2008 09 21 18 25 14 Delete Measurement SU 00 10 E7 22 90 E1 SLOT SU 00 10 E7 22 90 E1 admin 2008 09 21 18 53 29 Insert Chart first chart administrator 2008 09 22 16 54 42 Insert Chart member Slot 1 EIR first
276. u 00 10 7 22 58 16 FDD 10 0 16 20 SUs SU 00 10 E7 22 58 16 FDD 10 0 16 20 SUs SU 00 10 7 22 90 1F GE ORO NO IG GE IC GO IO ebe FDD 10 0 16 20 SUs SU 00 10 E7 22 90 1F SU 00 10 E7 22 57 0A SU 00 10 E7 E3 A1 82 SU 00 10 E7 22 0F 1E SU 00 10 7 22 0F 1E SU 00 10 E7 22 0F 69 Bee SU SNR BEES z SUSNR SURSSI SU SNR bg SURSSI E SU SNR SU TX POWER Measurement name SU 00 00 00 00 00 EE RSSI SU 00 00 00 00 00 EE SNR SU 00 10 E7 22 57 0A RSSI SU 00 10 E7 22 57 0A SNR SU 00 10 E7 3 A1 B2 RSSI SU 00 10 7 3 A182 SNR SU 00 10 7 22 0F 1E RSSI SU 00 10 7 22 0F 1E SNR SU 00 10 7 22 0F 1E TX POWER SU 00 10 7 22 0F 69 RSSI SU 00 10 7 22 0F 69 SNR SU 00 10 7 22 57 58 RSSI SU 00 10 7 22 57 58 SNR SU 00 10 7 22 58 16 RSSI SU 00 10 E7 22 58 16 SNR SU 00 10 E7 22 90 1F RSSI SU 00 10 7 22 90 1F SNR Figure 9 8 Virtual Equipment Modification Site Search Results Linked Equipment Under the virtual sites you cannot insert or delete equipment but you can link the already inserted equipment or remove an existing connection To create a link to equipment 1 From the Creating pull down menu select Link Equipment 2 Specify equipment parameters to search 3 From the search results select the equipment to be placed under the virtual site User Manual General Setting Options Customization 9 4 Customization In this menu
277. ual Getting Started Operations and Navigation in the Hierarchy 3 4 Operations and Navigation in the Hierarchy In Alarms Measurements and Reports pages and also under the Settings gt Site and Equipment Configuration submenu there are three elements at the top of the page These fields are always visible even if the page is scrolled E The Operations pull down menu located at the top right contains different options depending on the current object and menu item see Figure 3 4 Fast navigation between the menu items while keeping the actual location within the hierarchy for example immediate opening of the measurement charts form the equipment configuration A Print option for Alarms Measurements and Reports because this is the only possible way to print the full content of the main display area the basic print function of the browser is not suitable for this For Measurements an option to save the current object as a menu item Operation v Operation Print page Show history Show links Go to alarms Go to configuration Figure 3 4 Example of Operations pull down menu E A path at the top left showing the current location within the hierarchy It is always possible to click on the elements of this list except for the last one and return to a higher hierarchy level ROOT 4 ROOT gt FDD TFTP gt 10 0 16 10 SUs Figure 3 5 Hierarchy Path StarQuality User Manua
278. ual Threshold Crossing Alarms Monitoring Downloading Data to Excel Files 7 3 Downloading Data to Excel Files You can download the displayed data in XLS format The generated XLS file containing the measurement data also includes the name of the threshold and the background color of the data cells that violate the threshold matches the color code of its severity level If threshold violation occurred but that value was not taken into account in the current alarm then the background color of the cell is set to cyan If a public or private as opposed to normal chart is exported to an XLS file the generated file differs in the following aspects The number of columns and their names are the same as in the chart definition Regardless of the chart definition the values are not aggregated The resolution of rows follows the smallest time interval of the measurement data thus infrequent measurement data are stored sparsely in the table gt To save data to Excel E To save the alarms table click view xls open or save the file Figure 7 8 Sample XLS of Alarm Table HM To save the chart data click Export to XLS above the chart The first few lines of a sample exported XLS file are StarQuality User Manual Threshold Crossing Alarms Monitoring Downloading Data to Excel Files 12 2009 03 04 12 30 00 13 2009 03 04 12 45 00 Figure 7 9 Sample XLS File of Chart Data StarQuality User Manual
279. uality on Windows server with Oracle database on a separate machine refer to Table 2 1 The installation has to be performed by a local administrator user During the installation the installer writes information into two destinations the Details view and the log file To display the Details view click Show Details in the User Manual Installation Installing StarQuality installation wizard The log file is located in the Temp directory of the user by default C Documents and Settings lt USER gt Local Settings Temp 2 4 2 2 StarQuality Installation Procedure 1 Do one of the following Insert the installation DVD into the DVD drive or Copy unzip the Installation folder directly onto one of the disk drives for example C IMPORTANT Do not place the installation files into a long path This is an Oracle installer limitation 2 Run the installation program starquality exe The installation wizard is displayed M starQuality Setup Mile x Welcome to the StarQuality Setup Wizard This wizard will guide you through the installation of StarQuality It is recommended that you close all other applications before starting Setup This will make it possible to update relevant system files without having to reboot your computer Click Next to continue cm Figure 2 51 StarQuality Setup Wizard Window 3 Click Next the wizard displays a license agreement Please read the agreement carefully
280. uipment either Therefore the equipment is displayed similarly to other equipment under the Measurements and Alarms menu items and its threshold and charts definitions are also retained Viewing the Equipment Configuration To view the equipment configuration click on the icon of the equipment in the list a page with similar structure is displayed with the following differences E Only the active measurements are displayed and they cannot be modified E On this page the threshold settings related to the equipment is displayed which can also be modified from here 220 User Manual General Setting Options 9 3 3 4 9 3 3 5 9 3 3 6 StarQuality Equipment Configuration Name SU 00 00 00 00 00 EE IP address 10 0 16 10 Community public Inherited server group WiMAX FDD TFTP name Server uma FD TET colecor Previous server None Collect data Yes Keep collected ag data for days Default measurement interval SE Created by admin Created when 2009 02 08 14 06 41 Last modified by admin Last modified at 2009 02 08 14 06 41 Measurement type Index Name Interval SU RATE AVERAGE 0 SU RATE AVERAGE 15 min SU RATE MAX 0 SU RATE MAX 15 min SU RATE MIN 0 SU RATE MIN 15 min Figure 9 5 Viewing Equipment with Additional Equipment Parameters Equipment Deletion You can delete equipments even if measurements belong to them The deleted equipments measurements and measurement results will be deleted fro
281. ules are applied as in On Searching in General on page 158 Without enter strings to exclude from the search Type Equipments choose a specific equipment type Select the number of requested results in the report NOTE The message Not all matching rows returned may appear at the bottom of the table if there are more results than selected counts Click OK at the top right of the window The list of results is displayed Figure 8 10 5 To narrow or improve the filtering edit the title line and click OK Repeat until the requested results are returned aaa ree coe 4 _ Title line aaduawaawtaaadaaaada i 3 Figure 8 10 On demand Reports Measurement Types Q User Manual Reports On Demand Reports 6 Click Measurement Types in the selection path a list of available measurement types and calculations is displayed al AS I of Figure 8 11 On demand Reports Measurement Types Settings Select the measurement s at the left column and the calculation min max avg etc on the right column Click Object Parameters in the selection path a list of parameters is displayed These parameters will be the columns of the report Some of the parameters are already selected eer Seen a Gs GIG BG 6 eene erat Figure 8 12 On demand Reports Object Parameters Select the Measurement name check box the Show and Save options are enabled at the selection
282. uration pages refer to Setting Alarm Thresholds on page 165 Edit public charts For non virtual equipment accessing and private or public chart template configuration pages see Configuring Public and Private Charts on page 238 WiMAX inventory report Displays a table of all the CPEs in the site from a single BTS to the whole network The information includes BTS no BTS name by StarQuality Serving BS and CPE MAC address Alarms Measurements Reports Settings Site and equipment confi 4 ROOT gt Monitored SUs gt SU 00 10 E7 E2 2E BF Name IP address Community Inherited server group name Server Previous server Collect data Keep collected data for days Default measurement interval Created by Go to alarms Go to measurements SU 00 10 7 2 2 BH modify equipment odify equipment without discovery a tion 10 10 184 23 colleci BEE bell roup threshold reshold from template WiMAX FDD WiMAX inventory report Yes 30 15 min admin H Operations Drop dowr Menu Figure 9 1 Site and Equipment Configuration Window with Operations Drop down Menu 9 3 2 2 Adding and Editing Sites You can create objects by selecting the kind of object from the scroll down menu in the table header under the basic or virtual site see Figure 9 2 gt To add or edit a site 1
283. ure the Apache WEB server Y N Y y INFO Configuring Apache QUESTION On which port should Apache listen 80 QUESTION Where is the Apache apachectl file usr apache bin apachectl QUESTION Where is the Apache htpasswd file usr apache bin htpasswd QUESTION Where is the Apache pid file var run apache httpd pid QUESTION Where is the Apache httpd conf file etc apache httpd conf INFO Creating backup etc apache httpd conf 20090512 122852 from etc apache httpd conf Q User Manual Installation 2 5 2 6 StarQuality Installing StarQuality INFO Stopping Apache INFO Creating a new etc apache httpd conf INFO Starting Apache Automatic Starting and Stopping The installer application places scripts in the appropriate folder so that StarQuality can be automatically started and stopped Automatic start stop in this case does not include Oracle If you are not installing a data collector server then the installer asks whether the Oracle has to be automatically started and stopped by the same script as well You should only answer Yes if the Oracle server is running on the same machine and there is no other script to start and stop Oracle If the Oracle server is running on the same machine but such a script already exists then you have to make sure that StarQuality starts after the Oracle server and stops before the Oracle server This quest
284. urement Specify a searching string using one of the following methods User Manual Viewing Measurements On Searching in General 1 Simple search type the string directly in the input field and click OK 2 Click Advanced Search an advanced window is displayed which facilitates the construction of the searching string and contains the following insert fields a Search to parent name Yes No If you select yes the search finds those objects whose parent name meets the conditions e g the parent is the containing site for a piece of equipment b Name Name of the object to be searched The _ and characters match an arbitrary single letter while and match an arbitrary string The expressions in separate lines will be in OR relation with each other c Without Characters to be ignored by the system the format is the same as above d Type The type of the object to be searched Subtype can also be given for equipment equipment template and measurement type e Display deleted Display measurements of deleted equipments f Results count Maximum number of results Search D Ch Search Si h t OK Simple S PS no search Field Name DN Search Without Type All types v Display deleted No e Results count 50 count zl Figure 5 9 Advanced Search 3 Click OK The results are displayed as well as the searching string as it could be given at simple search StarQuality User
285. usage Table gt INPUT1 Lxin 1 sample ES lt inputl fedit del os weg GAS V risblei SNMP Memory ble gt INPUT le delinsts memory usage gt x lt varl gt gt V riabler Memory usage Table gt I 1 ixin 1 sampl lt input1 gt edit del G Saree AG del insts Host virtual memory usage gt x SE Variablel SNMP Virtual memory usage Table gt INPUT 1 ixin 1 sample Se ipl gt edit del H Papa Variable1 SNMP Error measurement Table Input value gt INPUT1 del insts I ut SG Ge or Varigble1 SNMP Error measurement Table Output value gt INPUT1 Lxin 1 samp lt equipl gt edit del Interface traffic gt xbps lt v l gt gt Variable SNMP Traffic measurement Table Input value gt INPUTL del insts x lt input1 gt ge or Variablel SNMP Traffic measurement Table Output value gt INPUT1 ixin 1 sam bps edit del oe Block changes second GA erste Goes Block changes INPUT del insts nges second gt x FG Variable changes second gt T1 ixin 1 sample I i lt equipl gt Ui arts nek cannes ftrancartion se et Marishlet Cracks Block channas transaction gt INPLIT1 tip 1 samnle Cl 4 gt Figure 6 1 Threshold Template Configuration Template List 2 Click add new The Threshold Configuration editor displays an empty template table StarQuality User Manual Setting Alarm Thresholds
286. variables 02 Report views 03 Scheduled reports StarQuality Report view configuration bes Name Type Toplevel First hierarchy level edit del tables 4Motion BottomN Uptime TopN Yes Measurements edit del tables 4Motion TopN Air Link Utilization TopN Yes Measurements edit del tables 4Motion TopN Average Sector Throughput TopN Yes Measurements edit del tables 4Motion TopN Number Of Connected SUs TopN Yes Measurements edit del tables Motion TopN Throughput TopN Yes Measurements edit del tables FDD BottomN Uptime Toon Ves Measurements edit del tables FDD TFTP BottomN Uptime TopN Yes Measurements edit del tables FDD TFTP TopN Air Link Utilization TopN Yes Measurements edit del tables FDD TFTP TopN Number Of Connected SUs TopN Yes Measurements edit del tables FDD TFTP TopN Throughput TopN Yes Measurements edit del tables FDD TopN Air Link Utilization TopN Yes Measurements edit del tables FDD TopN Number Of Connected SUs TopN Yes Measurements edit del tables FDD TopN Throughput Ton Yes Measurements edit del tables TDD BottomN Uptime TopN Yes Measurements edit del tables TDD TopN Air Link Utilization TopN Yes Measurements edit del tables TDD TopN Number Of Connected SUs Ton Yes Measurements edit del tables TDD TopN Throughput TopN Yes Measurements Figure 8 3 Report View Configuration Window example To create a new report view 1 Clic
287. veral minutes Figure 2 70 Setup Message 4 Click OK to the Setup message and wait for the installation to complete Click Finish 5 Proceed as in regular installation E Load a new licence that matches the new version see To load a licence on page 93 NOTE x Depending on what license is present before the upgrade the new license might deactivate the collection on certain collectors Click Reactivate eqs in the Licence Configuration Window to start the collection on all devices see Figure 2 66 A message will appear showing how many devices were activated E Start the servers see To start the server following initial installation on page 90 StarQuality Q User Manual Installation 2 10 2 StarQuality StarQuality Upgrade on Solaris StarQuality Upgrade on Solaris The upgrade has to be performed by an administrator user Upgrade is available between immediate adjacent versions only Stop the StarQuality service and processes prior to upgrade To upgrade StarQuality Solaris 1 Perform Stop Services as follows a While logged in as root user enter the command usr apache bin apachectl stop Actual path may vary according to the Apache configuration See Apache Configuration on page 77 Enter the command etc init d starquality stop 2 Run the installer application StarQuality v3 0 en bin 3 Follow the installation promps and enter OS user of Oracle ORACLE HOME env
288. win Setup oix Progress i This page displays the progress of the download or installation Installing libdb4 5 4 5 20 2 2 ust bin cygbz2 1 d Progress Total Disk Es Figure 2 49 Cygwin Installation Process 13 Click Finish Cygwin Setup Installation Status and Create Icons B lsl x Create Icons Tell setup if you want it to create a few icons for convenient access to the ze Cygwin environment IV Create icon on Desktop IV Add icon to Start Menu Installation Status Installation Complete Figure 2 50 Cygwin Installation Completion StarQuality User Manual Installation gt 2 4 2 2 4 2 1 StarQuality Installing StarQuality To download and install Cygwin from the Internet Make sure the Cygwin version you download and use includes the following packages Sapache bash coreutils cygutils expat gcc core gcc mingw g less libexpat1 libiconv2 libncurses8 libreadline6 make openssh ping termcap tzcode which Installing StarQuality Overview base files binutils crypt cygwin findutils gcc g grep libbz2 1 libexpat1 devel libintl3 libpere0 libwrapO mingw runtime openssl sed terminfo vim zlib base passwd bzip2 cygrunsrv editrights gawk gcc mingw core gzip libdb4 5 libgdbm4 libintl8 libpoptO login minires perl version 5 8 x x tar texinfo w32api This Installation type is applicable when installing StarQ
289. wireless medium excluding retransmissions There are also separate counts for concatenated frames that include one frame Single two frames Double or more than two frames More StarQuality 262 User Manual Device Specific Information Key Performance Indicators KPIs Table 11 7 BreezeACCESS VL Performance Counters Continued Counter Description Errors Received frames per second Phy The number of Physical errors unidentified signals CRC The number of frames received from the wireless medium containing CRC errors Overrun The number of frames that were discarded because the receive rate exceeded the processing capability or the capacity of the Ethernet port Decrypt The number of frames that were not received properly due to a problem in the data decryption mechanism Other Receive errors other than previous counters Duplicate frames discarded The number of data frames discarded because multiple copies were received If an acknowledgement message is not received by the originating unit the same data frame can be received more than once Although duplicate frames are included in all counters that include data frames only the first copy is forwarded to the Ethernet port Errors Transmitted frames per second Frames dropped too many retries The number of dropped frames which are unsuccessfully retransmitted without being acknowledged until the maximum permitted number of retr
290. y a space The set of visible public virtual sites pieces of equipment and charts are determined automatically based on the measurement objects accessible by the user For example HM The users can only view a public virtual site if they have the right to view its real or virtual parent site User Manual General Setting Options User Permissions Rights E The user scan view a virtual piece of equipment if they have the right to see all charts of that equipment E The user can view a public chart if they can view all measurements displayed on the chart gt To modify user rights 1 From Settings gt User select User Rights The User Rights window is displayed User rights Choose a user i sl Do not display the equipments M Do not display the E measurements Figure 9 31 User Selection 2 Select the user type and select whether the equipments and the measurements should also be included in the list of displayed objects 3 Click OK The User Rights modification window is displayed The elements that cannot be accessed by the user are displayed on the left hand side while those that can be viewed on the right hand side User rights Objects not selected Objects selected ROOT Schematic map First page Report New View Schematic map TDD Schematic map FDD SNMP Threshold Report FDD SNMP Occupation Schematic map 10 0 16 20 SUs ae Report FDD SNMP Throughput Report TDD Occupation Report T
291. yed User Manual General Setting Options Device and Measurement Summary 9 6 3 9 6 4 StarQuality 5 6 Select Licences The Licences Configuration window is displayed Click add new and browse for the file containing the license Click OK A list detailing the licenses is displayed Verify that the entry in the license list is not colored red Device and Measurement Summary You can display a list of all basic equipments and for each measurement type the number of objects in the system To use the summary list From Settings select Servers gt Device and Measurement Summary A table of all devices is displayed indicating the site and equipment name IP address FH C A and total number of measurements gt Browser Servers is 01 Licences gt 02 Device aud mensinement Summary table for all equipments I Site name Equipment name IP address FHCA Sum 03 Server groups a Server oaran view FDD TFTP 10 0 16 10 2 2 05 Start Stop Status view FDD SNMP 10 0 16 20 4 o 06 Server events view FDD SNMP 10 0 16 21 15 15 07 Collector load view Do 0055 pa e J view TDD 10 0 22 252 2 9 view SERVER HEALTH 172 30 105 216 135 135 view SERVER HEALTH 216 o o view VER HEAL 163 i SERVER HEALTH 216 H view SERVER HEALTH A 172 30 105 210 172 30 105 210 16162 37 37 view SERVER HEALTH Ac 172 30 105 210 16162 7 3 HEA 30 105 37 37 view SERVER HEALTH Free text H v
292. ype of StarQuality installation If the user and the directory already exist but the installer cannot find a valid StarQuality installation in the directory then it asks whether it should continue or not If it finds a StarQuality it stops until all StarQuality modules are stopped The installer prompts for the installation type that is if you are installing an additional server Answer No to this prompt WARNING YOU SHOULD ONLY ANSWER YES TO THE FOLLOWING QUESTION WARNING IF YOU ARE INSTALLING AN ADDITIONAL COLLECTOR SERVER WARNING OR YOU ARE UPGRADING SUCH AN ADDITIONAL COLLECTOR SERVER QUESTION Are you installing a collector server Y N N Apache Configuration If you are not installing a data collector the installer asks whether it should configure the Apache WEB server or you will configure it later This question is among the few yes no questions for which the installer stores the given answer and sets the default to your previous answer when running a second time and can accept this default answer in silent mode automatically If you answer Yes the installer asks for various Apache files and the port to be used and then configures it The default answers given to the user during the installation represent the answers for the default Apache installation according to the operating system QUESTION Do you want to config

Download Pdf Manuals

image

Related Search

Related Contents

    Patient Manual  manual de instruções  Logiciel Maxwell® Sample Track  Vakuumtester / Datenlogger Vacuum Tester / Data  Multi Channel software manual  MICROMASTER 440  Progress Lighting P5565-20 Installation Guide  

Copyright © All rights reserved.
Failed to retrieve file